This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 7.0.2 from ld.texi.

This file documents the GNU linker LD (GNU Binutils) version 2.42.

   Copyright © 1991-2024 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

   Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU
Free Documentation License”.
INFO-DIR-SECTION Software development
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
* Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY


File: ld.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Overview,  Up: (dir)

LD
**

This file documents the GNU linker ld (GNU Binutils) version 2.42.

   This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
Documentation License version 1.3.  A copy of the license is included in
the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License”.

* Menu:

* Overview::                    Overview
* Invocation::                  Invocation
* Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
* Plugins::                     Linker Plugins
* Special Sections::            Special Sections
* Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
* BFD::                         BFD

* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
* MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
* LD Index::                       LD Index


File: ld.info,  Node: Overview,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top

1 Overview
**********

‘ld’ combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their data
and ties up symbol references.  Usually the last step in compiling a
program is to run ‘ld’.

   ‘ld’ accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
AT&T’s Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
total control over the linking process.

   This version of ‘ld’ uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
operate on object files.  This allows ‘ld’ to read, combine, and write
object files in many different formats—for example, COFF or ‘a.out’.
Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
of object file.  *Note BFD::, for more information.

   Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
‘ld’ continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).


File: ld.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Scripts,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Top

2 Invocation
************

The GNU linker ‘ld’ is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, you
have many choices to control its behavior.

* Menu:

* Options::                     Command-line Options
* Environment::                 Environment Variables


File: ld.info,  Node: Options,  Next: Environment,  Up: Invocation

2.1 Command-line Options
========================

The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
practice few of them are used in any particular context.  For instance,
a frequent use of ‘ld’ is to link standard Unix object files on a
standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to link a file
‘hello.o’:

     ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc

   This tells ‘ld’ to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
linking the file ‘/lib/crt0.o’ with ‘hello.o’ and the library ‘libc.a’,
which will come from the standard search directories.  (See the
discussion of the ‘-l’ option below.)

   Some of the command-line options to ‘ld’ may be specified at any
point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
as ‘-l’ or ‘-T’, cause the file to be read at the point at which the
option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a different
argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
noted in the descriptions below.

   Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
linked together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
placed between an option and its argument.

   Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
can specify other forms of binary input files using ‘-l’, ‘-R’, and the
script command language.  If _no_ binary input files at all are
specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
message ‘No input files’.

   If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
linker script or the one specified by using ‘-T’).  This feature permits
the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object or an
archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses ‘INPUT’
or ‘GROUP’ to load other objects.  Specifying a script in this way
merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands placed
after the main script; use the ‘-T’ option to replace the default linker
script entirely, but note the effect of the ‘INSERT’ command.  *Note
Scripts::.

   For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
requires them.

   For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
can precede the option name; for example, ‘-trace-symbol’ and
‘--trace-symbol’ are equivalent.  Note—there is one exception to this
rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case ’o’ can only
be preceded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the ‘-o’
option.  So for example ‘-omagic’ sets the output file name to ‘magic’
whereas ‘--omagic’ sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.

   Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
‘--trace-symbol foo’ and ‘--trace-symbol=foo’ are equivalent.  Unique
abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.

   Note—if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
(e.g.  ‘gcc’) then all the linker command-line options should be
prefixed by ‘-Wl,’ (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
compiler driver) like this:

       gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group

   This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.  Confusion
may also arise when passing options that require values through a
driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as a
separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
and the argument to the compiler.  In this case, it is simplest to use
the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:

       gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map

   Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the
GNU linker:

‘@FILE’
     Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are inserted
     in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not exist, or
     cannot be read, then the option will be treated literally, and not
     removed.

     Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
     character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
     option in either single or double quotes.  Any character (including
     a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character to be
     included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain additional
     @FILE options; any such options will be processed recursively.

‘-a KEYWORD’
     This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The KEYWORD
     argument must be one of the strings ‘archive’, ‘shared’, or
     ‘default’.  ‘-aarchive’ is functionally equivalent to ‘-Bstatic’,
     and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
     ‘-Bdynamic’.  This option may be used any number of times.

‘--audit AUDITLIB’
     Adds AUDITLIB to the ‘DT_AUDIT’ entry of the dynamic section.
     AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
     DT_SONAME specified in the library.  If specified multiple times
     ‘DT_AUDIT’ will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces
     to use.  If the linker finds an object with an audit entry while
     searching for shared libraries, it will add a corresponding
     ‘DT_DEPAUDIT’ entry in the output file.  This option is only
     meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.

‘-b INPUT-FORMAT’
‘--format=INPUT-FORMAT’
     ‘ld’ may be configured to support more than one kind of object
     file.  If your ‘ld’ is configured this way, you can use the ‘-b’
     option to specify the binary format for input object files that
     follow this option on the command line.  Even when ‘ld’ is
     configured to support alternative object formats, you don’t usually
     need to specify this, as ‘ld’ should be configured to expect as a
     default input format the most usual format on each machine.
     INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular format
     supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the available binary
     formats with ‘objdump -i’.)  *Note BFD::.

     You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
     unusual binary format.  You can also use ‘-b’ to switch formats
     explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
     including ‘-b INPUT-FORMAT’ before each group of object files in a
     particular format.

     The default format is taken from the environment variable
     ‘GNUTARGET’.  *Note Environment::.  You can also define the input
     format from a script, using the command ‘TARGET’; see *note Format
     Commands::.

‘-c MRI-COMMANDFILE’
‘--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE’
     For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, ‘ld’ accepts script
     files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
     described in *note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI. Introduce MRI
     script files with the option ‘-c’; use the ‘-T’ option to run
     linker scripts written in the general-purpose ‘ld’ scripting
     language.  If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, ‘ld’ looks for it in the
     directories specified by any ‘-L’ options.

‘-d’
‘-dc’
‘-dp’
     These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
     for compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common
     symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with ‘-r’).
     The script command ‘FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION’ has the same effect.
     *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.

‘--depaudit AUDITLIB’
‘-P AUDITLIB’
     Adds AUDITLIB to the ‘DT_DEPAUDIT’ entry of the dynamic section.
     AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
     DT_SONAME specified in the library.  If specified multiple times
     ‘DT_DEPAUDIT’ will contain a colon separated list of audit
     interfaces to use.  This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
     supporting the rtld-audit interface.  The -P option is provided for
     Solaris compatibility.

‘--enable-linker-version’
     Enables the ‘LINKER_VERSION’ linker script directive, described in
     *note Output Section Data::.  If this directive is used in a linker
     script and this option has been enabled then a string containing
     the linker version will be inserted at the current point.

     Note - this location of this option on the linker command line is
     significant.  It will only affect linker scripts that come after it
     on the command line, or which are built into the linker.

‘--disable-linker-version’
     Disables the ‘LINKER_VERSION’ linker script directive, so that it
     does not insert a version string.  This is the default.

‘--enable-non-contiguous-regions’
     This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
     fit a matching output section.  The linker tries to allocate the
     input section to subseque nt matching output sections, and
     generates an error only if no output section is large enough.  This
     is useful when several non-contiguous memory regions are available
     and the input section does not require a particular one.  The order
     in which input sections are evaluated does not change, for
     instance:

            MEMORY {
              MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
              MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
              MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN = 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
            }
            SECTIONS {
              mem1 : { *(.data.*); } > MEM1
              mem2 : { *(.data.*); } > MEM2
              mem3 : { *(.data.*); } > MEM3
            }

            with input sections:
            .data.1: size 8
            .data.2: size 0x10
            .data.3: size 4

            results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
            affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.

     This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it
     changes the way input sections are mapped to output sections.

‘--enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings’
     This option enables warnings when ‘--enable-non-contiguous-regions’
     allows possibly unexpected matches in sections mapping, potentially
     leading to silently discarding a section instead of failing because
     it does not fit any output region.

‘-e ENTRY’
‘--entry=ENTRY’
     Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
     program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no
     symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
     and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
     in base 10; you may use a leading ‘0x’ for base 16, or a leading
     ‘0’ for base 8).  *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
     and other ways of specifying the entry point.

‘--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...’
     Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not
     be automatically exported.  The library names may be delimited by
     commas or colons.  Specifying ‘--exclude-libs ALL’ excludes symbols
     in all archive libraries from automatic export.  This option is
     available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the linker and for
     ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols explicitly listed in a
     .def file are still exported, regardless of this option.  For ELF
     targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will be treated as
     hidden.

‘--exclude-modules-for-implib MODULE,MODULE,...’
     Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which
     symbols should not be automatically exported, but which should be
     copied wholesale into the import library being generated during the
     link.  The module names may be delimited by commas or colons, and
     must match exactly the filenames used by ‘ld’ to open the files;
     for archive members, this is simply the member name, but for object
     files the name listed must include and match precisely any path
     used to specify the input file on the linker’s command-line.  This
     option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
     linker.  Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still
     exported, regardless of this option.

‘-E’
‘--export-dynamic’
‘--no-export-dynamic’
     When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the ‘-E’
     option or the ‘--export-dynamic’ option causes the linker to add
     all symbols to the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table
     is the set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run
     time.

     If you do not use either of these options (or use the
     ‘--no-export-dynamic’ option to restore the default behavior), the
     dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which
     are referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.

     If you use ‘dlopen’ to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
     back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
     dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
     linking the program itself.

     You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should be
     added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
     See the description of ‘--dynamic-list’.

     Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports.  PE
     targets support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL
     or EXE; see the description of ‘--export-all-symbols’ below.

‘--export-dynamic-symbol=GLOB’
     When creating a dynamically linked executable, symbols matching
     GLOB will be added to the dynamic symbol table.  When creating a
     shared library, references to symbols matching GLOB will not be
     bound to the definitions within the shared library.  This option is
     a no-op when creating a shared library and ‘-Bsymbolic’ or
     ‘--dynamic-list’ are not specified.  This option is only meaningful
     on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.

‘--export-dynamic-symbol-list=FILE’
     Specify a ‘--export-dynamic-symbol’ for each pattern in the file.
     The format of the file is the same as the version node without
     scope and node name.  See *note VERSION:: for more information.

‘-EB’
     Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.

‘-EL’
     Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output
     format.

‘-f NAME’
‘--auxiliary=NAME’
     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
     field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
     the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
     auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.

     If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
     you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
     field.  If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
     object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
     shared object NAME.  If there is one, it will be used instead of
     the definition in the filter object.  The shared object NAME need
     not exist.  Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
     alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
     debugging or for machine-specific performance.

     This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY
     entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
     command line.

‘-F NAME’
‘--filter=NAME’
     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
     field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
     the symbol table of the shared object which is being created should
     be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.

     If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
     you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
     field.  The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
     symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
     link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME.  Thus the
     filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
     provided by the object NAME.

     Some older linkers used the ‘-F’ option throughout a compilation
     toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
     output object files.  The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for this
     purpose: the ‘-b’, ‘--format’, ‘--oformat’ options, the ‘TARGET’
     command in linker scripts, and the ‘GNUTARGET’ environment
     variable.  The GNU linker will ignore the ‘-F’ option when not
     creating an ELF shared object.

‘-fini=NAME’
     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
     the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
     the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses ‘_fini’
     as the function to call.

‘-g’
     Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.

‘-G VALUE’
‘--gpsize=VALUE’
     Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
     register to SIZE.  This is only meaningful for object file formats
     such as MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into
     different sections.  This is ignored for other object file formats.

‘-h NAME’
‘-soname=NAME’
     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
     field to the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a
     shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable
     is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the shared object
     specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than using the file name
     given to the linker.

‘-i’
     Perform an incremental link (same as option ‘-r’).

‘-init=NAME’
     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
     the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
     the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses ‘_init’
     as the function to call.

‘-l NAMESPEC’
‘--library=NAMESPEC’
     Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list of
     files to link.  This option may be used any number of times.  If
     NAMESPEC is of the form ‘:FILENAME’, ‘ld’ will search the library
     path for a file called FILENAME, otherwise it will search the
     library path for a file called ‘libNAMESPEC.a’.

     On systems which support shared libraries, ‘ld’ may also search for
     files other than ‘libNAMESPEC.a’.  Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
     systems, ‘ld’ will search a directory for a library called
     ‘libNAMESPEC.so’ before searching for one called ‘libNAMESPEC.a’.
     (By convention, a ‘.so’ extension indicates a shared library.)
     Note that this behavior does not apply to ‘:FILENAME’, which always
     specifies a file called FILENAME.

     The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
     it is specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a
     symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before the
     archive on the command line, the linker will include the
     appropriate file(s) from the archive.  However, an undefined symbol
     in an object appearing later on the command line will not cause the
     linker to search the archive again.

     See the ‘-(’ option for a way to force the linker to search
     archives multiple times.

     You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.

     This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
     However, if you are using ‘ld’ on AIX, note that it is different
     from the behaviour of the AIX linker.

‘-L SEARCHDIR’
‘--library-path=SEARCHDIR’
     Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that ‘ld’ will search for
     archive libraries and ‘ld’ control scripts.  You may use this
     option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the
     order in which they are specified on the command line.  Directories
     specified on the command line are searched before the default
     directories.  All ‘-L’ options apply to all ‘-l’ options,
     regardless of the order in which the options appear.  ‘-L’ options
     do not affect how ‘ld’ searches for a linker script unless ‘-T’
     option is specified.

     If SEARCHDIR begins with ‘=’ or ‘$SYSROOT’, then this prefix will
     be replaced by the “sysroot prefix”, controlled by the ‘--sysroot’
     option, or specified when the linker is configured.

     The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
     ‘-L’) depends on which emulation mode ‘ld’ is using, and in some
     cases also on how it was configured.  *Note Environment::.

     The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
     ‘SEARCH_DIR’ command.  Directories specified this way are searched
     at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
     line.

‘-m EMULATION’
     Emulate the EMULATION linker.  You can list the available
     emulations with the ‘--verbose’ or ‘-V’ options.

     If the ‘-m’ option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
     ‘LDEMULATION’ environment variable, if that is defined.

     Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
     configured.

‘--remap-inputs=pattern=filename’
‘--remap-inputs-file=file’
     These options allow the names of input files to be changed before
     the linker attempts to open them.  The option
     ‘--remap-inputs=foo.o=bar.o’ will cause any attempt to load a file
     called ‘foo.o’ to instead try to load a file called ‘bar.o’.
     Wildcard patterns are permitted in the first filename, so
     ‘--remap-inputs=foo*.o=bar.o’ will rename any input file that
     matches ‘foo*.o’ to ‘bar.o’.

     An alternative form of the option ‘--remap-inputs-file=filename’
     allows the remappings to be read from a file.  Each line in the
     file can contain a single remapping.  Blank lines are ignored.
     Anything from a hash character (‘#’) to the end of a line is
     considered to be a comment and is also ignored.  The mapping
     pattern can be separated from the filename by whitespace or an
     equals (‘=’) character.

     The options can be specified multiple times.  Their contents
     accumulate.  The remappings will be processed in the order in which
     they occur on the command line, and if they come from a file, in
     the order in which they occur in the file.  If a match is made, no
     further checking for that filename will be performed.

     If the replacement filename is ‘/dev/null’ or just ‘NUL’ then the
     remapping will actually cause the input file to be ignored.  This
     can be a convenient way to experiment with removing input files
     from a complicated build environment.

     Note that this option is position dependent and only affects
     filenames that come after it on the command line.  Thus:

            ld foo.o --remap-inputs=foo.o=bar.o

     Will have no effect, whereas:

            ld --remap-inputs=foo.o=bar.o foo.o

     Will rename the input file ‘foo.o’ to ‘bar.o’.

     Note - these options also affect files referenced by _INPUT_
     statements in linker scripts.  But since linker scripts are
     processed after the entire command line is read, the position of
     the remap options on the command line is not significant.

     If the ‘verbose’ option is enabled then any mappings that match
     will be reported, although again the ‘verbose’ option needs to be
     enabled on the command line _before_ the remaped filenames appear.

     If the ‘-Map’ or ‘--print-map’ options are enabled then the
     remapping list will be included in the map output.

‘-M’
‘--print-map’
     Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
     information about the link, including the following:

        • Where object files are mapped into memory.
        • How common symbols are allocated.
        • All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
          the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
        • The values assigned to symbols.

          Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
          which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
          symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
          This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
          only retains the final value of an expression.  Under such
          circumstances the linker will display the final value enclosed
          by square brackets.  Thus for example a linker script
          containing:

                  foo = 1
                  foo = foo * 4
                  foo = foo + 8

          will produce the following output in the link map if the ‘-M’
          option is used:

                  0x00000001                foo = 0x1
                  [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
                  [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)

          See *note Expressions:: for more information about expressions
          in linker scripts.

        • How GNU properties are merged.

          When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into
          one output .note.gnu.property section, some properties are
          removed or updated.  These actions are reported in the link
          map.  For example:

               Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)

          This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output
          when merging properties in ‘foo.o’, whose property 0xc0000002
          value is 0x1, and ‘bar.o’, which doesn’t have property
          0xc0000002.

               Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)

          This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to
          0x1 in output when merging properties in ‘foo.o’, whose
          0xc0010001 property value is 0x1, and ‘bar.o’, whose
          0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.

        • On some ELF targets, a list of fixups inserted by ‘--relax’

               foo.o: Adjusting branch at 0x00000008 towards "far" in section .text

          This indicates that the branch at 0x00000008 in foo.o,
          targeting the symbol "far" in section .text, has been replaced
          by a trampoline.

‘--print-map-discarded’
‘--no-print-map-discarded’
     Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected
     sections in the link map.  Enabled by default.

‘--print-map-locals’
‘--no-print-map-locals’
     Print (or do not print) local symbols in the link map.  Local
     symbols will have the text ‘(local)’ printed before their name, and
     will be listed after all of the global symbols in a given section.
     Temporary local symbols (typically those that start with ‘.L’) will
     not be included in the output.  Disabled by default.

‘-n’
‘--nmagic’
     Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against
     shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
     numbers, mark the output as ‘NMAGIC’.

‘-N’
‘--omagic’
     Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also,
     do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
     shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
     numbers, mark the output as ‘OMAGIC’.  Note: Although a writable
     text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to
     the format specification published by Microsoft.

‘--no-omagic’
     This option negates most of the effects of the ‘-N’ option.  It
     sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
     to be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking
     against shared libraries.  Use ‘-Bdynamic’ for this.

‘-o OUTPUT’
‘--output=OUTPUT’
     Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by ‘ld’; if this
     option is not specified, the name ‘a.out’ is used by default.  The
     script command ‘OUTPUT’ can also specify the output file name.

‘--dependency-file=DEPFILE’
     Write a “dependency file” to DEPFILE.  This file contains a rule
     suitable for ‘make’ describing the output file and all the input
     files that were read to produce it.  The output is similar to the
     compiler’s output with ‘-M -MP’ (*note Options Controlling the
     Preprocessor: (gcc.info)Preprocessor Options.).  Note that there is
     no option like the compiler’s ‘-MM’, to exclude “system files”
     (which is not a well-specified concept in the linker, unlike
     “system headers” in the compiler).  So the output from
     ‘--dependency-file’ is always specific to the exact state of the
     installation where it was produced, and should not be copied into
     distributed makefiles without careful editing.

‘-O LEVEL’
     If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero ‘ld’ optimizes the
     output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore
     probably should only be enabled for the final binary.  At the
     moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation.
     Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option.
     Also currently there is no difference in the linker’s behaviour for
     different non-zero values of this option.  Again this may change
     with future releases.

‘-plugin NAME’
     Involve a plugin in the linking process.  The NAME parameter is the
     absolute filename of the plugin.  Usually this parameter is
     automatically added by the complier, when using link time
     optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
     wish.

     Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is
     different from the place where the ‘ar’, ‘nm’ and ‘ranlib’ programs
     search for their plugins.  In order for those commands to make use
     of a compiler based plugin it must first be copied into the
     ‘${libdir}/bfd-plugins’ directory.  All gcc based linker plugins
     are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to just copy in the
     newest one.

‘--push-state’
     The ‘--push-state’ allows one to preserve the current state of the
     flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
     restored with one corresponding ‘--pop-state’ option.

     The option which are covered are: ‘-Bdynamic’, ‘-Bstatic’, ‘-dn’,
     ‘-dy’, ‘-call_shared’, ‘-non_shared’, ‘-static’, ‘-N’, ‘-n’,
     ‘--whole-archive’, ‘--no-whole-archive’, ‘-r’, ‘-Ur’,
     ‘--copy-dt-needed-entries’, ‘--no-copy-dt-needed-entries’,
     ‘--as-needed’, ‘--no-as-needed’, and ‘-a’.

     One target for this option are specifications for ‘pkg-config’.
     When used with the ‘--libs’ option all possibly needed libraries
     are listed and then possibly linked with all the time.  It is
     better to return something as follows:

          -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state

‘--pop-state’
     Undoes the effect of –push-state, restores the previous values of
     the flags governing input file handling.

‘-q’
‘--emit-relocs’
     Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
     Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information
     in order to perform correct modifications of executables.  This
     results in larger executables.

     This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.

‘--force-dynamic’
     Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is
     specific to VxWorks targets.

‘-r’
‘--relocatable’
     Generate relocatable output—i.e., generate an output file that can
     in turn serve as input to ‘ld’.  This is often called “partial
     linking”.  As a side effect, in environments that support standard
     Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file’s magic
     number to ‘OMAGIC’.  If this option is not specified, an absolute
     file is produced.  When linking C++ programs, this option _will
     not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use ‘-Ur’.

     When an input file does not have the same format as the output
     file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does not
     contain any relocations.  Different output formats can have further
     restrictions; for example some ‘a.out’-based formats do not support
     partial linking with input files in other formats at all.

     This option does the same thing as ‘-i’.

‘-R FILENAME’
‘--just-symbols=FILENAME’
     Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
     relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output
     file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
     in other programs.  You may use this option more than once.

     For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the ‘-R’ option is
     followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
     treated as the ‘-rpath’ option.

‘-s’
‘--strip-all’
     Omit all symbol information from the output file.

‘-S’
‘--strip-debug’
     Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
     output file.

‘--strip-discarded’
‘--no-strip-discarded’
     Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
     Enabled by default.

‘-t’
‘--trace’
     Print the names of the input files as ‘ld’ processes them.  If ‘-t’
     is given twice then members within archives are also printed.  ‘-t’
     output is useful to generate a list of all the object files and
     scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
     a linker bug report.

‘-T SCRIPTFILE’
‘--script=SCRIPTFILE’
     Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script.  This script replaces ‘ld’’s
     default linker script (rather than adding to it), unless the script
     contains ‘INSERT’, so COMMANDFILE must specify everything necessary
     to describe the output file.  *Note Scripts::.  If SCRIPTFILE does
     not exist in the current directory, ‘ld’ looks for it in the
     directories specified by any preceding ‘-L’ options.  Multiple ‘-T’
     options accumulate.

‘-dT SCRIPTFILE’
‘--default-script=SCRIPTFILE’
     Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script.  *Note Scripts::.

     This option is similar to the ‘--script’ option except that
     processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
     command line has been processed.  This allows options placed after
     the ‘--default-script’ option on the command line to affect the
     behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
     linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.  (eg
     because the command line is being constructed by another tool, such
     as ‘gcc’).

‘-u SYMBOL’
‘--undefined=SYMBOL’
     Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
     symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
     modules from standard libraries.  ‘-u’ may be repeated with
     different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
     This option is equivalent to the ‘EXTERN’ linker script command.

     If this option is being used to force additional modules to be
     pulled into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to
     remain undefined, then the option ‘--require-defined’ should be
     used instead.

‘--require-defined=SYMBOL’
     Require that SYMBOL is defined in the output file.  This option is
     the same as option ‘--undefined’ except that if SYMBOL is not
     defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error and
     exit.  The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
     ‘EXTERN’, ‘ASSERT’ and ‘DEFINED’ together.  This option can be used
     multiple times to require additional symbols.

‘-Ur’

     For programs that do not use constructors or destructors, or for
     ELF based systems this option is equivalent to ‘-r’: it generates
     relocatable output—i.e., an output file that can in turn serve as
     input to ‘ld’.  For other binaries however the ‘-Ur’ option is
     similar to ‘-r’ but it also resolves references to constructors and
     destructors.

     For those systems where ‘-r’ and ‘-Ur’ behave differently, it does
     not work to use ‘-Ur’ on files that were themselves linked with
     ‘-Ur’; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot be
     added to.  Use ‘-Ur’ only for the last partial link, and ‘-r’ for
     the others.

‘--orphan-handling=MODE’
     Control how orphan sections are handled.  An orphan section is one
     not specifically mentioned in a linker script.  *Note Orphan
     Sections::.

     MODE can have any of the following values:

     ‘place’
          Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section
          following the strategy described in *note Orphan Sections::.
          The option ‘--unique’ also affects how sections are placed.

     ‘discard’
          All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
          ‘/DISCARD/’ section (*note Output Section Discarding::).

     ‘warn’
          The linker will place the orphan section as for ‘place’ and
          also issue a warning.

     ‘error’
          The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is
          found.

     The default if ‘--orphan-handling’ is not given is ‘place’.

‘--unique[=SECTION]’
     Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
     SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
     for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
     specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
     multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging
     of input sections with the same name, overriding output section
     assignments in a linker script.

‘-v’
‘--version’
‘-V’
     Display the version number for ‘ld’.  The ‘-V’ option also lists
     the supported emulations.  See also the description of the
     ‘--enable-linker-version’ in *note Command-line Options: Options.
     which can be used to insert the linker version string into a
     binary.

‘-x’
‘--discard-all’
     Delete all local symbols.

‘-X’
‘--discard-locals’
     Delete all temporary local symbols.  (These symbols start with
     system-specific local label prefixes, typically ‘.L’ for ELF
     systems or ‘L’ for traditional a.out systems.)

‘-y SYMBOL’
‘--trace-symbol=SYMBOL’
     Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears.  This
     option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is
     necessary to prepend an underscore.

     This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
     link but don’t know where the reference is coming from.

‘-Y PATH’
     Add PATH to the default library search path.  This option exists
     for Solaris compatibility.

‘-z KEYWORD’
     The recognized keywords are:

     ‘call-nop=prefix-addr’
     ‘call-nop=suffix-nop’
     ‘call-nop=prefix-BYTE’
     ‘call-nop=suffix-BYTE’
          Specify the 1-byte ‘NOP’ padding when transforming indirect
          call to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
          ‘call-nop=prefix-addr’ generates ‘0x67 call foo’.
          ‘call-nop=suffix-nop’ generates ‘call foo 0x90’.
          ‘call-nop=prefix-BYTE’ generates ‘BYTE call foo’.
          ‘call-nop=suffix-BYTE’ generates ‘call foo BYTE’.  Supported
          for i386 and x86_64.

     ‘cet-report=none’
     ‘cet-report=warning’
     ‘cet-report=error’
          Specify how to report the missing
          GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
          GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input
          .note.gnu.property section.  ‘cet-report=none’, which is the
          default, will make the linker not report missing properties in
          input files.  ‘cet-report=warning’ will make the linker issue
          a warning for missing properties in input files.
          ‘cet-report=error’ will make the linker issue an error for
          missing properties in input files.  Note that ‘ibt’ will turn
          off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report
          and ‘shstk’ will turn off the missing
          GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.  Supported
          for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.

     ‘combreloc’
     ‘nocombreloc’
          Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to
          improve dynamic symbol lookup caching.  Do not do this if
          ‘nocombreloc’.

     ‘common’
     ‘nocommon’
          Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a
          relocatable link.  Use STT_OBJECT type if ‘nocommon’.

     ‘common-page-size=VALUE’
          Set the page size most commonly used to VALUE.  Memory image
          layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the
          system is using pages of this size.

     ‘defs’
          Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
          This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic
          shared library.  This option is the inverse of ‘-z undefs’.

     ‘dynamic-undefined-weak’
     ‘nodynamic-undefined-weak’
          Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
          object, if they are referenced from a regular object file and
          not forced local by symbol visibility or versioning.  Do not
          make them dynamic if ‘nodynamic-undefined-weak’.  If neither
          option is given, a target may default to either option being
          in force, or make some other selection of undefined weak
          symbols dynamic.  Not all targets support these options.

     ‘execstack’
          Marks the object as requiring executable stack.

     ‘global’
          This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
          It makes the symbols defined by this shared object available
          for symbol resolution of subsequently loaded libraries.

     ‘globalaudit’
          This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic
          executable.  This option marks the executable as requiring
          global auditing by setting the ‘DF_1_GLOBAUDIT’ bit in the
          ‘DT_FLAGS_1’ dynamic tag.  Global auditing requires that any
          auditing library defined via the ‘--depaudit’ or ‘-P’
          command-line options be run for all dynamic objects loaded by
          the application.

     ‘ibtplt’
          Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT
          entries.  Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.

     ‘ibt’
          Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property
          section to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies
          ‘ibtplt’.  Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.

     ‘indirect-extern-access’
     ‘noindirect-extern-access’
          Generate GNU_PROPERTY_1_NEEDED_INDIRECT_EXTERN_ACCESS in
          .note.gnu.property section to indicate that object file
          requires canonical function pointers and cannot be used with
          copy relocation.  This option also implies
          ‘noextern-protected-data’ and ‘nocopyreloc’.  Supported for
          i386 and x86-64.

          ‘noindirect-extern-access’ removes
          GNU_PROPERTY_1_NEEDED_INDIRECT_EXTERN_ACCESS from
          .note.gnu.property section.

     ‘initfirst’
          This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
          It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
          occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
          brought into the process at the same time.  Similarly the
          runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
          runtime finalization of any other objects.

     ‘interpose’
          Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol
          search order so that symbols in this shared library interpose
          all other shared libraries not so marked.

     ‘unique’
     ‘nounique’
          When generating a shared library or other dynamically loadable
          ELF object mark it as one that should (by default) only ever
          be loaded once, and only in the main namespace (when using
          ‘dlmopen’).  This is primarily used to mark fundamental
          libraries such as libc, libpthread et al which do not usually
          function correctly unless they are the sole instances of
          themselves.  This behaviour can be overridden by the ‘dlmopen’
          caller and does not apply to certain loading mechanisms (such
          as audit libraries).

     ‘lam-u48’
          Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U48 in
          .note.gnu.property section to indicate compatibility with
          Intel LAM_U48.  Supported for Linux/x86_64.

     ‘lam-u57’
          Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U57 in
          .note.gnu.property section to indicate compatibility with
          Intel LAM_U57.  Supported for Linux/x86_64.

     ‘lam-u48-report=none’
     ‘lam-u48-report=warning’
     ‘lam-u48-report=error’
          Specify how to report the missing
          GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U48 property in input
          .note.gnu.property section.  ‘lam-u48-report=none’, which is
          the default, will make the linker not report missing
          properties in input files.  ‘lam-u48-report=warning’ will make
          the linker issue a warning for missing properties in input
          files.  ‘lam-u48-report=error’ will make the linker issue an
          error for missing properties in input files.  Supported for
          Linux/x86_64.

     ‘lam-u57-report=none’
     ‘lam-u57-report=warning’
     ‘lam-u57-report=error’
          Specify how to report the missing
          GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U57 property in input
          .note.gnu.property section.  ‘lam-u57-report=none’, which is
          the default, will make the linker not report missing
          properties in input files.  ‘lam-u57-report=warning’ will make
          the linker issue a warning for missing properties in input
          files.  ‘lam-u57-report=error’ will make the linker issue an
          error for missing properties in input files.  Supported for
          Linux/x86_64.

     ‘lam-report=none’
     ‘lam-report=warning’
     ‘lam-report=error’
          Specify how to report the missing
          GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U48 and
          GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_LAM_U57 properties in input
          .note.gnu.property section.  ‘lam-report=none’, which is the
          default, will make the linker not report missing properties in
          input files.  ‘lam-report=warning’ will make the linker issue
          a warning for missing properties in input files.
          ‘lam-report=error’ will make the linker issue an error for
          missing properties in input files.  Supported for
          Linux/x86_64.

     ‘lazy’
          When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
          tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
          the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
          than at load time.  Lazy binding is the default.

     ‘loadfltr’
          Specify that the object’s filters be processed immediately at
          runtime.

     ‘max-page-size=VALUE’
          Set the maximum memory page size supported to VALUE.

     ‘mark-plt’
     ‘nomark-plt’
          Mark PLT entries with dynamic tags, DT_X86_64_PLT,
          DT_X86_64_PLTSZ and DT_X86_64_PLTENT. Since this option stores
          a non-zero value in the r_addend field of R_X86_64_JUMP_SLOT
          relocations, the resulting executables and shared libraries
          are incompatible with dynamic linkers, such as those in older
          versions of glibc without the change to ignore r_addend in
          R_X86_64_GLOB_DAT and R_X86_64_JUMP_SLOT relocations, which
          don’t ignore the r_addend field of R_X86_64_JUMP_SLOT
          relocations.  Supported for x86_64.

     ‘muldefs’
          Allow multiple definitions.

     ‘nocopyreloc’
          Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of
          variables defined in shared libraries.  May result in dynamic
          text relocations.

     ‘nodefaultlib’
          Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of
          this object should ignore any default library search paths.

     ‘nodelete’
          Specify that the object shouldn’t be unloaded at runtime.

     ‘nodlopen’
          Specify that the object is not available to ‘dlopen’.

     ‘nodump’
          Specify that the object can not be dumped by ‘dldump’.

     ‘noexecstack’
          Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.

     ‘noextern-protected-data’
          Don’t treat protected data symbols as external when building a
          shared library.  This option overrides the linker backend
          default.  It can be used to work around incorrect relocations
          against protected data symbols generated by compiler.  Updates
          on protected data symbols by another module aren’t visible to
          the resulting shared library.  Supported for i386 and x86-64.

     ‘noreloc-overflow’
          Disable relocation overflow check.  This can be used to
          disable relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic
          relocation overflow at run-time.  Supported for x86_64.

     ‘now’
          When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
          tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
          program is started, or when the shared library is loaded by
          dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution to the
          point when the function is first called.

     ‘origin’
          Specify that the object requires ‘$ORIGIN’ handling in paths.

     ‘pack-relative-relocs’
     ‘nopack-relative-relocs’
          Generate compact relative relocation in position-independent
          executable and shared library.  It adds ‘DT_RELR’, ‘DT_RELRSZ’
          and ‘DT_RELRENT’ entries to the dynamic section.  It is
          ignored when building position-dependent executable and
          relocatable output.  ‘nopack-relative-relocs’ is the default,
          which disables compact relative relocation.  When linked
          against the GNU C Library, a GLIBC_ABI_DT_RELR symbol version
          dependency on the shared C Library is added to the output.
          Supported for i386 and x86-64.

     ‘relro’
     ‘norelro’
          Create an ELF ‘PT_GNU_RELRO’ segment header in the object.
          This specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only
          after relocation, if supported.  Specifying ‘common-page-size’
          smaller than the system page size will render this protection
          ineffective.  Don’t create an ELF ‘PT_GNU_RELRO’ segment if
          ‘norelro’.

     ‘report-relative-reloc’
          Report dynamic relative relocations generated by linker.
          Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.

     ‘sectionheader’
     ‘nosectionheader’
          Generate section header.  Don’t generate section header if
          ‘nosectionheader’ is used.  ‘sectionheader’ is the default.

     ‘separate-code’
     ‘noseparate-code’
          Create separate code ‘PT_LOAD’ segment header in the object.
          This specifies a memory segment that should contain only
          instructions and must be in wholly disjoint pages from any
          other data.  Don’t create separate code ‘PT_LOAD’ segment if
          ‘noseparate-code’ is used.

     ‘shstk’
          Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in
          .note.gnu.property section to indicate compatibility with
          Intel Shadow Stack.  Supported for Linux/i386 and
          Linux/x86_64.

     ‘stack-size=VALUE’
          Specify a stack size for an ELF ‘PT_GNU_STACK’ segment.
          Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
          ‘PT_GNU_STACK’ segment creation.

     ‘start-stop-gc’
     ‘nostart-stop-gc’
          When ‘--gc-sections’ is in effect, a reference from a retained
          section to ‘__start_SECNAME’ or ‘__stop_SECNAME’ causes all
          input sections named ‘SECNAME’ to also be retained, if
          ‘SECNAME’ is representable as a C identifier and either
          ‘__start_SECNAME’ or ‘__stop_SECNAME’ is synthesized by the
          linker.  ‘-z start-stop-gc’ disables this effect, allowing
          sections to be garbage collected as if the special synthesized
          symbols were not defined.  ‘-z start-stop-gc’ has no effect on
          a definition of ‘__start_SECNAME’ or ‘__stop_SECNAME’ in an
          object file or linker script.  Such a definition will prevent
          the linker providing a synthesized ‘__start_SECNAME’ or
          ‘__stop_SECNAME’ respectively, and therefore the special
          treatment by garbage collection for those references.

     ‘start-stop-visibility=VALUE’
          Specify the ELF symbol visibility for synthesized
          ‘__start_SECNAME’ and ‘__stop_SECNAME’ symbols (*note Input
          Section Example::).  VALUE must be exactly ‘default’,
          ‘internal’, ‘hidden’, or ‘protected’.  If no ‘-z
          start-stop-visibility’ option is given, ‘protected’ is used
          for compatibility with historical practice.  However, it’s
          highly recommended to use ‘-z start-stop-visibility=hidden’ in
          new programs and shared libraries so that these symbols are
          not exported between shared objects, which is not usually
          what’s intended.

     ‘text’
     ‘notext’
     ‘textoff’
          Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the
          position-independent or shared object has dynamic relocations
          in read-only sections.  Don’t report an error if ‘notext’ or
          ‘textoff’.

     ‘undefs’
          Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object
          files, either when creating an executable, or when creating a
          shared library.  This option is the inverse of ‘-z defs’.

     ‘unique-symbol’
     ‘nounique-symbol’
          Avoid duplicated local symbol names in the symbol string
          table.  Append ".‘number’" to duplicated local symbol names if
          ‘unique-symbol’ is used.  ‘nounique-symbol’ is the default.

     ‘x86-64-baseline’
     ‘x86-64-v2’
     ‘x86-64-v3’
     ‘x86-64-v4’
          Specify the x86-64 ISA level needed in .note.gnu.property
          section.  ‘x86-64-baseline’ generates
          ‘GNU_PROPERTY_X86_ISA_1_BASELINE’.  ‘x86-64-v2’ generates
          ‘GNU_PROPERTY_X86_ISA_1_V2’.  ‘x86-64-v3’ generates
          ‘GNU_PROPERTY_X86_ISA_1_V3’.  ‘x86-64-v4’ generates
          ‘GNU_PROPERTY_X86_ISA_1_V4’.  Supported for Linux/i386 and
          Linux/x86_64.

     Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.

‘-( ARCHIVES -)’
‘--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group’
     The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files.  They may be either
     explicit file names, or ‘-l’ options.

     The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
     undefined references are created.  Normally, an archive is searched
     only once in the order that it is specified on the command line.
     If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an undefined
     symbol referred to by an object in an archive that appears later on
     the command line, the linker would not be able to resolve that
     reference.  By grouping the archives, they will all be searched
     repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.

     Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best
     to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
     between two or more archives.

‘--accept-unknown-input-arch’
‘--no-accept-unknown-input-arch’
     Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
     recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are
     doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
     This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14.
     The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such
     input files, and so the ‘--accept-unknown-input-arch’ option has
     been added to restore the old behaviour.

‘--as-needed’
‘--no-as-needed’
     This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
     mentioned on the command line after the ‘--as-needed’ option.
     Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
     library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
     library is actually needed or not.  ‘--as-needed’ causes a
     DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted for a library that _at that point
     in the link_ satisfies a non-weak undefined symbol reference from a
     regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
     DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a non-weak undefined
     symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.  Object files
     or libraries appearing on the command line _after_ the library in
     question do not affect whether the library is seen as needed.  This
     is similar to the rules for extraction of object files from
     archives.  ‘--no-as-needed’ restores the default behaviour.

     Note: On Linux based systems the ‘--as-needed’ option also has an
     affect on the behaviour of the ‘--rpath’ and ‘--rpath-link’
     options.  See the description of ‘--rpath-link’ for more details.

‘--add-needed’
‘--no-add-needed’
     These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
     their names to the ‘--as-needed’ and ‘--no-as-needed’ options.
     They have been replaced by ‘--copy-dt-needed-entries’ and
     ‘--no-copy-dt-needed-entries’.

‘-assert KEYWORD’
     This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.

‘-Bdynamic’
‘-dy’
‘-call_shared’
     Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on
     platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  This option is
     normally the default on such platforms.  The different variants of
     this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You may
     use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
     library searching for ‘-l’ options which follow it.

‘-Bgroup’
     Set the ‘DF_1_GROUP’ flag in the ‘DT_FLAGS_1’ entry in the dynamic
     section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
     object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
     ‘--unresolved-symbols=report-all’ is implied.  This option is only
     meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.

‘-Bstatic’
‘-dn’
‘-non_shared’
‘-static’
     Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
     platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
     variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems.
     You may use this option multiple times on the command line: it
     affects library searching for ‘-l’ options which follow it.  This
     option also implies ‘--unresolved-symbols=report-all’.  This option
     can be used with ‘-shared’.  Doing so means that a shared library
     is being created but that all of the library’s external references
     must be resolved by pulling in entries from static libraries.

‘-Bsymbolic’
     When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
     to the definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it
     is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
     override the definition within the shared library.  This option is
     only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.

‘-Bsymbolic-functions’
     When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
     symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.  This
     option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
     libraries.

‘-Bno-symbolic’
     This option can cancel previously specified ‘-Bsymbolic’ and
     ‘-Bsymbolic-functions’.

‘--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE’
     Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker.  This is
     typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
     global symbols whose references shouldn’t be bound to the
     definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
     linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
     added to the symbol table in the executable.  This option is only
     meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.

     The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
     without scope and node name.  See *note VERSION:: for more
     information.

‘--dynamic-list-data’
     Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.

‘--dynamic-list-cpp-new’
     Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
     It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.

‘--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo’
     Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
     identification.

‘--check-sections’
‘--no-check-sections’
     Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
     been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the
     linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
     will produce suitable error messages.  The linker does know about,
     and does make allowances for sections in overlays.  The default
     behaviour can be restored by using the command-line switch
     ‘--check-sections’.  Section overlap is not usually checked for
     relocatable links.  You can force checking in that case by using
     the ‘--check-sections’ option.

‘--copy-dt-needed-entries’
‘--no-copy-dt-needed-entries’
     This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
     by DT_NEEDED tags _inside_ ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
     command line.  Normally the linker won’t add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
     output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
     input dynamic library.  With ‘--copy-dt-needed-entries’ specified
     on the command line however any dynamic libraries that follow it
     will have their DT_NEEDED entries added.  The default behaviour can
     be restored with ‘--no-copy-dt-needed-entries’.

     This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in
     dynamic libraries.  With ‘--copy-dt-needed-entries’ dynamic
     libraries mentioned on the command line will be recursively
     searched, following their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in
     order to resolve symbols required by the output binary.  With the
     default setting however the searching of dynamic libraries that
     follow it will stop with the dynamic library itself.  No DT_NEEDED
     links will be traversed to resolve symbols.

‘--cref’
     Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
     generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
     Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.

     The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
     easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are printed
     out, sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file names is
     given.  If the symbol is defined, the first file listed is the
     location of the definition.  If the symbol is defined as a common
     value then any files where this happens appear next.  Finally any
     files that reference the symbol are listed.

‘--ctf-variables’
‘--no-ctf-variables’
     The CTF debuginfo format supports a section which encodes the names
     and types of variables found in the program which do not appear in
     any symbol table.  These variables clearly cannot be looked up by
     address by conventional debuggers, so the space used for their
     types and names is usually wasted: the types are usually small but
     the names are often not.  ‘--ctf-variables’ causes the generation
     of such a section.  The default behaviour can be restored with
     ‘--no-ctf-variables’.

‘--ctf-share-types=METHOD’
     Adjust the method used to share types between translation units in
     CTF.

     ‘share-unconflicted’
          Put all types that do not have ambiguous definitions into the
          shared dictionary, where debuggers can easily access them,
          even if they only occur in one translation unit.  This is the
          default.

     ‘share-duplicated’
          Put only types that occur in multiple translation units into
          the shared dictionary: types with only one definition go into
          per-translation-unit dictionaries.  Types with ambiguous
          definitions in multiple translation units always go into
          per-translation-unit dictionaries.  This tends to make the CTF
          larger, but may reduce the amount of CTF in the shared
          dictionary.  For very large projects this may speed up opening
          the CTF and save memory in the CTF consumer at runtime.

‘--no-define-common’
     This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
     The script command ‘INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION’ has the same effect.
     *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.

     The ‘--no-define-common’ option allows decoupling the decision to
     assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
     file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces assigning
     addresses to Common symbols.  Using ‘--no-define-common’ allows
     Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to be
     assigned addresses only in the main program.  This eliminates the
     unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also prevents any
     possible confusion over resolving to the wrong duplicate when there
     are many dynamic modules with specialized search paths for runtime
     symbol resolution.

‘--force-group-allocation’
     This option causes the linker to place section group members like
     normal input sections, and to delete the section groups.  This is
     the default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used
     to change the behaviour of a relocatable link (‘-r’).  The script
     command ‘FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION’ has the same effect.  *Note
     Miscellaneous Commands::.

‘--defsym=SYMBOL=EXPRESSION’
     Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
     address given by EXPRESSION.  You may use this option as many times
     as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.  A
     limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in this
     context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an
     existing symbol, or use ‘+’ and ‘-’ to add or subtract hexadecimal
     constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate expressions,
     consider using the linker command language from a script (*note
     Assignments::).  _Note:_ there should be no white space between
     SYMBOL, the equals sign (“<=>”), and EXPRESSION.

     The linker processes ‘--defsym’ arguments and ‘-T’ arguments in
     order, placing ‘--defsym’ before ‘-T’ will define the symbol before
     the linker script from ‘-T’ is processed, while placing ‘--defsym’
     after ‘-T’ will define the symbol after the linker script has been
     processed.  This difference has consequences for expressions within
     the linker script that use the ‘--defsym’ symbols, which order is
     correct will depend on what you are trying to achieve.

‘--demangle[=STYLE]’
‘--no-demangle’
     These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
     messages and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle, it
     tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
     leading underscores if they are used by the object file format, and
     converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
     Different compilers have different mangling styles.  The optional
     demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
     demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will demangle by
     default unless the environment variable ‘COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE’ is
     set.  These options may be used to override the default.

‘-IFILE’
‘--dynamic-linker=FILE’
     Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
     generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
     linker is normally correct; don’t use this unless you know what you
     are doing.

‘--no-dynamic-linker’
     When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
     linker to be used at load-time.  This is only meaningful for ELF
     executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
     entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.

‘--embedded-relocs’
     This option is similar to the ‘--emit-relocs’ option except that
     the relocs are stored in a target-specific section.  This option is
     only supported by the ‘BFIN’, ‘CR16’ and _M68K_ targets.

‘--disable-multiple-abs-defs’
     Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included in filename
     invoked by -R or –just-symbols

‘--fatal-warnings’
‘--no-fatal-warnings’
     Treat all warnings as errors.  The default behaviour can be
     restored with the option ‘--no-fatal-warnings’.

‘-w’
‘--no-warnings’
     Do not display any warning or error messages.  This overrides
     ‘--fatal-warnings’ if it has been enabled.  This option can be used
     when it is known that the output binary will not work, but there is
     still a need to create it.

‘--force-exe-suffix’
     Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.

     If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
     ‘.exe’ or ‘.dll’ suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
     output file to one of the same name with a ‘.exe’ suffix.  This
     option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
     Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won’t run an
     image unless it ends in a ‘.exe’ suffix.

‘--gc-sections’
‘--no-gc-sections’
     Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored
     on targets that do not support this option.  The default behaviour
     (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
     specifying ‘--no-gc-sections’ on the command line.  Note that
     garbage collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but
     the implementation is currently considered to be experimental.

     ‘--gc-sections’ decides which input sections are used by examining
     symbols and relocations.  The section containing the entry symbol
     and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line
     will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by
     dynamic objects.  Note that when building shared libraries, the
     linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced.  Once
     this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker
     recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
     relocations.  See ‘--entry’, ‘--undefined’, and
     ‘--gc-keep-exported’.

     This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with
     option ‘-r’).  In this case the root of symbols kept must be
     explicitly specified either by one of the options ‘--entry’,
     ‘--undefined’, or ‘--gc-keep-exported’ or by a ‘ENTRY’ command in
     the linker script.

     As a GNU extension, ELF input sections marked with the
     ‘SHF_GNU_RETAIN’ flag will not be garbage collected.

‘--print-gc-sections’
‘--no-print-gc-sections’
     List all sections removed by garbage collection.  The listing is
     printed on stderr.  This option is only effective if garbage
     collection has been enabled via the ‘--gc-sections’) option.  The
     default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
     can be restored by specifying ‘--no-print-gc-sections’ on the
     command line.

‘--gc-keep-exported’
     When ‘--gc-sections’ is enabled, this option prevents garbage
     collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols
     having default or protected visibility.  This option is intended to
     be used for executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise
     be garbage collected regardless of the external visibility of
     contained symbols.  Note that this option has no effect when
     linking shared objects since it is already the default behaviour.
     This option is only supported for ELF format targets.

‘--print-output-format’
     Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
     other command-line options).  This is the string that would appear
     in an ‘OUTPUT_FORMAT’ linker script command (*note File
     Commands::).

‘--print-memory-usage’
     Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created
     with the *note MEMORY:: command.  This is useful on embedded
     targets to have a quick view of amount of free memory.  The format
     of the output has one headline and one line per region.  It is both
     human readable and easily parsable by tools.  Here is an example of
     an output:

          Memory region         Used Size  Region Size  %age Used
                       ROM:        256 KB         1 MB     25.00%
                       RAM:          32 B         2 GB      0.00%

‘--help’
     Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
     and exit.

‘--target-help’
     Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard
     output and exit.

‘-Map=MAPFILE’
     Print a link map to the file MAPFILE.  See the description of the
     ‘-M’ option, above.  If MAPFILE is just the character ‘-’ then the
     map will be written to stdout.

     Specifying a directory as MAPFILE causes the linker map to be
     written as a file inside the directory.  Normally name of the file
     inside the directory is computed as the basename of the OUTPUT file
     with ‘.map’ appended.  If however the special character ‘%’ is used
     then this will be replaced by the full path of the output file.
     Additionally if there are any characters after the % symbol then
     ‘.map’ will no longer be appended.

           -o foo.exe -Map=bar                  [Creates ./bar]
           -o ../dir/foo.exe -Map=bar           [Creates ./bar]
           -o foo.exe -Map=../dir               [Creates ../dir/foo.exe.map]
           -o ../dir2/foo.exe -Map=../dir       [Creates ../dir/foo.exe.map]
           -o foo.exe -Map=%                    [Creates ./foo.exe.map]
           -o ../dir/foo.exe -Map=%             [Creates ../dir/foo.exe.map]
           -o foo.exe -Map=%.bar                [Creates ./foo.exe.bar]
           -o ../dir/foo.exe -Map=%.bar         [Creates ../dir/foo.exe.bar]
           -o ../dir2/foo.exe -Map=../dir/%     [Creates ../dir/../dir2/foo.exe.map]
           -o ../dir2/foo.exe -Map=../dir/%.bar [Creates ../dir/../dir2/foo.exe.bar]

     It is an error to specify more than one ‘%’ character.

     If the map file already exists then it will be overwritten by this
     operation.

‘--no-keep-memory’
     ‘ld’ normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
     symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells ‘ld’ to
     instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
     as necessary.  This may be required if ‘ld’ runs out of memory
     space while linking a large executable.

‘--no-undefined’
‘-z defs’
     Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
     This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
     library.  The switch ‘--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined’ controls the
     behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
     libraries being linked in.

     The effects of this option can be reverted by using ‘-z undefs’.

‘--allow-multiple-definition’
‘-z muldefs’
     Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
     report a fatal error.  These options allow multiple definitions and
     the first definition will be used.

‘--allow-shlib-undefined’
‘--no-allow-shlib-undefined’
     Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.  This
     switch is similar to ‘--no-undefined’ except that it determines the
     behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a shared library rather
     than a regular object file.  It does not affect how undefined
     symbols in regular object files are handled.

     The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
     referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to
     create an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used
     to create a shared library.

     The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
     libraries specified at link time are that:

        • A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as
          the one that is available at load time, so the symbol might
          actually be resolvable at load time.
        • There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where
          undefined symbols in shared libraries are normal.

          The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load
          time to select whichever function is most appropriate for the
          current architecture.  This is used, for example, to
          dynamically select an appropriate memset function.

‘--error-handling-script=SCRIPTNAME’
     If this option is provided then the linker will invoke SCRIPTNAME
     whenever an error is encountered.  Currently however only two kinds
     of error are supported: missing symbols and missing libraries.  Two
     arguments will be passed to script: the keyword “undefined-symbol”
     or ‘missing-lib” and the NAME of the undefined symbol or missing
     library.  The intention is that the script will provide suggestions
     to the user as to where the symbol or library might be found.
     After the script has finished then the normal linker error message
     will be displayed.

     The availability of this option is controlled by a configure time
     switch, so it may not be present in specific implementations.

‘--no-undefined-version’
     Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
     ignore it.  This option disallows symbols with undefined version
     and a fatal error will be issued instead.

‘--default-symver’
     Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
     unversioned exported symbols.

‘--default-imported-symver’
     Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
     unversioned imported symbols.

‘--no-warn-mismatch’
     Normally ‘ld’ will give an error if you try to link together input
     files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
     have been compiled for different processors or for different
     endiannesses.  This option tells ‘ld’ that it should silently
     permit such possible errors.  This option should only be used with
     care, in cases when you have taken some special action that ensures
     that the linker errors are inappropriate.

‘--no-warn-search-mismatch’
     Normally ‘ld’ will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
     library during a library search.  This option silences the warning.

‘--no-whole-archive’
     Turn off the effect of the ‘--whole-archive’ option for subsequent
     archive files.

‘--noinhibit-exec’
     Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
     Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
     encounters errors during the link process; it exits without writing
     an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.

‘-nostdlib’
     Only search library directories explicitly specified on the command
     line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts (including
     linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.

‘--oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT’
     ‘ld’ may be configured to support more than one kind of object
     file.  If your ‘ld’ is configured this way, you can use the
     ‘--oformat’ option to specify the binary format for the output
     object file.  Even when ‘ld’ is configured to support alternative
     object formats, you don’t usually need to specify this, as ‘ld’
     should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
     usual format on each machine.  OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
     name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You
     can list the available binary formats with ‘objdump -i’.)  The
     script command ‘OUTPUT_FORMAT’ can also specify the output format,
     but this option overrides it.  *Note BFD::.

‘--out-implib FILE’
     Create an import library in FILE corresponding to the executable
     the linker is generating (eg.  a DLL or ELF program).  This import
     library (which should be called ‘*.dll.a’ or ‘*.a’ for DLLs) may be
     used to link clients against the generated executable; this
     behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library
     creation step (eg.  ‘dlltool’ for DLLs).  This option is only
     available for the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.

‘-pie’
‘--pic-executable’
     Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only
     supported on ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are
     similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
     dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
     (which can vary between invocations).  Like normal dynamically
     linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
     executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.

‘-no-pie’
     Create a position dependent executable.  This is the default.

‘-qmagic’
     This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.

‘-Qy’
     This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.

‘--relax’
‘--no-relax’
     An option with machine dependent effects.  This option is only
     supported on a few targets.  *Note ‘ld’ and the H8/300: H8/300.
     *Note ‘ld’ and Xtensa Processors: Xtensa.  *Note ‘ld’ and the
     68HC11 and 68HC12: M68HC11/68HC12.  *Note ‘ld’ and the Altera Nios
     II: Nios II. *Note ‘ld’ and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support: PowerPC
     ELF32.

     On some platforms the ‘--relax’ option performs target specific,
     global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
     addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
     synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
     instructions, and combining constant values.

     On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
     symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible.  This is
     known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family
     of processors.

     On platforms where the feature is supported, the option
     ‘--no-relax’ will disable it.

     On platforms where the feature is not supported, both ‘--relax’ and
     ‘--no-relax’ are accepted, but ignored.

‘--retain-symbols-file=FILENAME’
     Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
     all others.  FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
     per line.  This option is especially useful in environments (such
     as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
     gradually, to conserve run-time memory.

     ‘--retain-symbols-file’ does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
     symbols needed for relocations.

     You may only specify ‘--retain-symbols-file’ once in the command
     line.  It overrides ‘-s’ and ‘-S’.

‘-rpath=DIR’
     Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used
     when linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All ‘-rpath’
     arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
     uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.

     The ‘-rpath’ option is also used when locating shared objects which
     are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see
     the description of the ‘-rpath-link’ option.  Searching ‘-rpath’ in
     this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers
     which have been configured with the ‘--with-sysroot’ option.

     If ‘-rpath’ is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
     contents of the environment variable ‘LD_RUN_PATH’ will be used if
     it is defined.

     The ‘-rpath’ option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
     SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
     ‘-L’ options it is given.  If a ‘-rpath’ option is used, the
     runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the ‘-rpath’
     options, ignoring the ‘-L’ options.  This can be useful when using
     gcc, which adds many ‘-L’ options which may be on NFS mounted file
     systems.

     For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the ‘-R’ option is
     followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
     treated as the ‘-rpath’ option.

‘-rpath-link=DIR’
     When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
     This happens when an ‘ld -shared’ link includes a shared library as
     one of the input files.

     When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
     non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
     locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
     it is not included explicitly.  In such a case, the ‘-rpath-link’
     option specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
     ‘-rpath-link’ option may specify a sequence of directory names
     either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
     appearing multiple times.

     The tokens $ORIGIN and $LIB can appear in these search directories.
     They will be replaced by the full path to the directory containing
     the program or shared object in the case of $ORIGIN and either
     ‘lib’ - for 32-bit binaries - or ‘lib64’ - for 64-bit binaries - in
     the case of $LIB.

     The alternative form of these tokens - ${ORIGIN} and ${LIB} can
     also be used.  The token $PLATFORM is not supported.

     This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
     path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library.  In
     such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
     search path than the runtime linker would do.

     The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
     shared libraries:

       1. Any directories specified by ‘-rpath-link’ options.
       2. Any directories specified by ‘-rpath’ options.  The difference
          between ‘-rpath’ and ‘-rpath-link’ is that directories
          specified by ‘-rpath’ options are included in the executable
          and used at runtime, whereas the ‘-rpath-link’ option is only
          effective at link time.  Searching ‘-rpath’ in this way is
          only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
          been configured with the ‘--with-sysroot’ option.
       3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the ‘-rpath’ and
          ‘-rpath-link’ options were not used, search the contents of
          the environment variable ‘LD_RUN_PATH’.
       4. On SunOS, if the ‘-rpath’ option was not used, search any
          directories specified using ‘-L’ options.
       5. For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
          variable ‘LD_LIBRARY_PATH’.
       6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in ‘DT_RUNPATH’ or
          ‘DT_RPATH’ of a shared library are searched for shared
          libraries needed by it.  The ‘DT_RPATH’ entries are ignored if
          ‘DT_RUNPATH’ entries exist.
       7. For a linker for a Linux system, if the file ‘/etc/ld.so.conf’
          exists, the list of directories found in that file.  Note: the
          path to this file is prefixed with the ‘sysroot’ value, if
          that is defined, and then any ‘prefix’ string if the linker
          was configured with the ‘--prefix=<path>’ option.
       8. For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories
          specified by the ‘_PATH_ELF_HINTS’ macro defined in the
          ‘elf-hints.h’ header file.
       9. Any directories specified by a ‘SEARCH_DIR’ command in a
          linker script given on the command line, including scripts
          specified by ‘-T’ (but not ‘-dT’).
       10. The default directories, normally ‘/lib’ and ‘/usr/lib’.
       11. Any directories specified by a plugin
          LDPT_SET_EXTRA_LIBRARY_PATH.
       12. Any directories specified by a ‘SEARCH_DIR’ command in a
          default linker script.

     Note however on Linux based systems there is an additional caveat:
     If the ‘--as-needed’ option is active _and_ a shared library is
     located which would normally satisfy the search _and_ this library
     does not have DT_NEEDED tag for ‘libc.so’ _and_ there is a shared
     library later on in the set of search directories which also
     satisfies the search _and_ this second shared library does have a
     DT_NEEDED tag for ‘libc.so’ _then_ the second library will be
     selected instead of the first.

     If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
     a warning and continue with the link.

‘-shared’
‘-Bshareable’
     Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF,
     XCOFF and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will automatically
     create a shared library if the ‘-e’ option is not used and there
     are undefined symbols in the link.

‘--sort-common’
‘--sort-common=ascending’
‘--sort-common=descending’
     This option tells ‘ld’ to sort the common symbols by alignment in
     ascending or descending order when it places them in the
     appropriate output sections.  The symbol alignments considered are
     sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and
     one-byte.  This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment
     constraints.  If no sorting order is specified, then descending
     order is assumed.

‘--sort-section=name’
     This option will apply ‘SORT_BY_NAME’ to all wildcard section
     patterns in the linker script.

‘--sort-section=alignment’
     This option will apply ‘SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT’ to all wildcard section
     patterns in the linker script.

‘--spare-dynamic-tags=COUNT’
     This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
     .dynamic section of ELF shared objects.  Empty slots may be needed
     by post processing tools, such as the prelinker.  The default is 5.

‘--split-by-file[=SIZE]’
     Similar to ‘--split-by-reloc’ but creates a new output section for
     each input file when SIZE is reached.  SIZE defaults to a size of 1
     if not given.

‘--split-by-reloc[=COUNT]’
     Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
     single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
     relocations.  This is useful when generating huge relocatable files
     for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF object
     file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
     relocations in a single section.  Note that this will fail to work
     with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
     The linker will not split up individual input sections for
     redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
     COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
     relocations.  COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.

‘--stats’
     Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
     such as execution time and memory usage.

‘--sysroot=DIRECTORY’
     Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
     configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
     that were configured using ‘--with-sysroot’.

‘--task-link’
     This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked
     object file where all of the global symbols have been converted to
     statics.

‘--traditional-format’
     For some targets, the output of ‘ld’ is different in some ways from
     the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests ‘ld’ to
     use the traditional format instead.

     For example, on SunOS, ‘ld’ combines duplicate entries in the
     symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file
     with full debugging information by over 30 percent.  Unfortunately,
     the SunOS ‘dbx’ program can not read the resulting program (‘gdb’
     has no trouble).  The ‘--traditional-format’ switch tells ‘ld’ to
     not combine duplicate entries.

‘--section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG’
     Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
     by ORG.  You may use this option as many times as necessary to
     locate multiple sections in the command line.  ORG must be a single
     hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers, you may
     omit the leading ‘0x’ usually associated with hexadecimal values.
     _Note:_ there should be no white space between SECTIONNAME, the
     equals sign (“<=>”), and ORG.

‘-Tbss=ORG’
‘-Tdata=ORG’
‘-Ttext=ORG’
     Same as ‘--section-start’, with ‘.bss’, ‘.data’ or ‘.text’ as the
     SECTIONNAME.

‘-Ttext-segment=ORG’
     When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the
     first byte of the text segment.

‘-Trodata-segment=ORG’
     When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
     the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the
     executable text, it will set the address of the first byte of the
     read-only data segment.

‘-Tldata-segment=ORG’
     When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium
     memory model, it will set the address of the first byte of the
     ldata segment.

‘--unresolved-symbols=METHOD’
     Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four
     possible values for ‘method’:

     ‘ignore-all’
          Do not report any unresolved symbols.

     ‘report-all’
          Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.

     ‘ignore-in-object-files’
          Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
          libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
          files.

     ‘ignore-in-shared-libs’
          Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files,
          but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.  This can
          be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that
          all the shared libraries that it should be referencing are
          included on the linker’s command line.

     The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
     controlled by the ‘--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined’ option.

     Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
     reported unresolved symbol but the option
     ‘--warn-unresolved-symbols’ can change this to a warning.

‘--dll-verbose’
‘--verbose[=NUMBER]’
     Display the version number for ‘ld’ and list the linker emulations
     supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
     Display the linker script being used by the linker.  If the
     optional NUMBER argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be
     displayed.

‘--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE’
     Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is
     typically used when creating shared libraries to specify additional
     information about the version hierarchy for the library being
     created.  This option is only fully supported on ELF platforms
     which support shared libraries; see *note VERSION::.  It is
     partially supported on PE platforms, which can use version scripts
     to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any symbols marked
     ‘local’ in the version script will not be exported.  *Note WIN32::.

‘--warn-common’
     Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or
     with a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy
     practice, but linkers on some other operating systems do not.  This
     option allows you to find potential problems from combining global
     symbols.  Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you
     may get some warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in
     your programs.

     There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
     examples:

     ‘int i = 1;’
          A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
          the output file.

     ‘extern int i;’
          An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.  There
          must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
          variable somewhere.

     ‘int i;’
          A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common
          symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area
          of the output file.  The linker merges multiple common symbols
          for the same variable into a single symbol.  If they are of
          different sizes, it picks the largest size.  The linker turns
          a common symbol into a declaration, if there is a definition
          of the same variable.

     The ‘--warn-common’ option can produce five kinds of warnings.
     Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
     symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
     symbol encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two
     symbols will be a common symbol.

       1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
          already a definition for the symbol.
               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
                  overridden by definition
               FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here

       2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
          definition for the symbol is encountered.  This is the same as
          the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered in
          a different order.
               FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
                  overriding common
               FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here

       3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
          symbol.
               FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
                  of `SYMBOL'
               FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here

       4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
                  overridden by larger common
               FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here

       5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol.
          This is the same as the previous case, except that the symbols
          are encountered in a different order.
               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
                  overriding smaller common
               FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here

‘--warn-constructors’
     Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for
     a few object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the
     linker can not detect the use of global constructors.

‘--warn-execstack’
‘--warn-execstack-objects’
‘--no-warn-execstack’
     On ELF platforms the linker may generate warning messages if it is
     asked to create an output file that contains an executable stack.
     There are three possible states:
       1. Do not generate any warnings.
       2. Always generate warnings, even if the executable stack is
          requested via the ‘-z execstack’ command line option.
       3. Only generate a warning if an object file requests an
          executable stack, but not if the ‘-z execstack’ option is
          used.

     The default state depends upon how the linker was configured when
     it was built.  The ‘--no-warn-execstack’ option always puts the
     linker into the no-warnings state.  The ‘--warn-execstack’ option
     puts the linker into the warn-always state.  The
     ‘--warn-execstack-objects’ option puts the linker into the
     warn-for-object-files-only state.

     Note: ELF format input files can specify that they need an
     executable stack by having a .NOTE.GNU-STACK section with the
     executable bit set in its section flags.  They can specify that
     they do not need an executable stack by having the same section,
     but without the executable flag bit set.  If an input file does not
     have a .NOTE.GNU-STACK section then the default behaviour is target
     specific.  For some targets, then absence of such a section implies
     that an executable stack _is_ required.  This is often a problem
     for hand crafted assembler files.

‘--error-execstack’
‘--no-error-execstack’
     If the linker is going to generate a warning message about an
     executable stack then the ‘--error-execstack’ option will instead
     change that warning into an error.  Note - this option does not
     change the linker’s execstack warning generation state.  Use
     ‘--warn-execstack’ or ‘--warn-execstack-objects’ to set a specific
     warning state.

     The ‘--no-error-execstack’ option will restore the default
     behaviour of generating warning messages.

‘--warn-multiple-gp’
     Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
     file.  This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
     Alpha.  Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in
     a special section.  A special register (the global pointer) points
     into the middle of this section, so that constants can be loaded
     efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.  Since
     the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively
     small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant
     pool.  Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary to use
     multiple global pointer values in order to be able to address all
     possible constants.  This option causes a warning to be issued
     whenever this case occurs.

‘--warn-once’
     Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
     module which refers to it.

‘--warn-rwx-segments’
‘--no-warn-rwx-segments’
     Warn if the linker creates a loadable, non-zero sized segment that
     has all three of the read, write and execute permission flags set.
     Such a segment represents a potential security vulnerability.  In
     addition warnings will be generated if a thread local storage
     segment is created with the execute permission flag set, regardless
     of whether or not it has the read and/or write flags set.

     These warnings are enabled by default.  They can be disabled via
     the ‘--no-warn-rwx-segments’ option and re-enabled via the
     ‘--warn-rwx-segments’ option.

‘--error-rwx-segments’
‘--no-error-rwx-segments’
     If the linker is going to generate a warning message about an
     executable, writeable segment, or an executable TLS segment, then
     the ‘--error-rwx-segments’ option will turn this warning into an
     error instead.  The ‘--no-error-rwx-segments’ option will restore
     the default behaviour of just generating a warning message.

     Note - the ‘--error-rwx-segments’ option does not by itself turn on
     warnings about these segments.  These warnings are either enabled
     by default, if the linker was configured that way, or via the
     ‘--warn-rwx-segments’ command line option.

‘--warn-section-align’
     Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
     alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
     section.  The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
     specified; that is, if the ‘SECTIONS’ command does not specify a
     start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).

‘--warn-textrel’
     Warn if the linker adds DT_TEXTREL to a position-independent
     executable or shared object.

‘--warn-alternate-em’
     Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.

‘--warn-unresolved-symbols’
     If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
     option ‘--unresolved-symbols’) it will normally generate an error.
     This option makes it generate a warning instead.

‘--error-unresolved-symbols’
     This restores the linker’s default behaviour of generating errors
     when it is reporting unresolved symbols.

‘--whole-archive’
     For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
     ‘--whole-archive’ option, include every object file in the archive
     in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
     object files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into a
     shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
     resulting shared library.  This option may be used more than once.

     Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn’t know
     about this option, so you have to use ‘-Wl,-whole-archive’.
     Second, don’t forget to use ‘-Wl,-no-whole-archive’ after your list
     of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to your
     link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.

‘--wrap=SYMBOL’
     Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL.  Any undefined reference to
     SYMBOL will be resolved to ‘__wrap_SYMBOL’.  Any undefined
     reference to ‘__real_SYMBOL’ will be resolved to SYMBOL.

     This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
     wrapper function should be called ‘__wrap_SYMBOL’.  If it wishes to
     call the system function, it should call ‘__real_SYMBOL’.

     Here is a trivial example:

          void *
          __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
          {
            printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
            return __real_malloc (c);
          }

     If you link other code with this file using ‘--wrap malloc’, then
     all calls to ‘malloc’ will call the function ‘__wrap_malloc’
     instead.  The call to ‘__real_malloc’ in ‘__wrap_malloc’ will call
     the real ‘malloc’ function.

     You may wish to provide a ‘__real_malloc’ function as well, so that
     links without the ‘--wrap’ option will succeed.  If you do this,
     you should not put the definition of ‘__real_malloc’ in the same
     file as ‘__wrap_malloc’; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
     call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to ‘malloc’.

     Only undefined references are replaced by the linker.  So,
     translation unit internal references to SYMBOL are not resolved to
     ‘__wrap_SYMBOL’.  In the next example, the call to ‘f’ in ‘g’ is
     not resolved to ‘__wrap_f’.

          int
          f (void)
          {
            return 123;
          }

          int
          g (void)
          {
            return f();
          }

‘--eh-frame-hdr’
‘--no-eh-frame-hdr’
     Request (‘--eh-frame-hdr’) or suppress (‘--no-eh-frame-hdr’) the
     creation of ‘.eh_frame_hdr’ section and ELF ‘PT_GNU_EH_FRAME’
     segment header.

‘--no-ld-generated-unwind-info’
     Request creation of ‘.eh_frame’ unwind info for linker generated
     code sections like PLT. This option is on by default if linker
     generated unwind info is supported.  This option also controls the
     generation of ‘.sframe’ stack trace info for linker generated code
     sections like PLT.

‘--enable-new-dtags’
‘--disable-new-dtags’
     This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
     ELF systems may not understand them.  If you specify
     ‘--enable-new-dtags’, the new dynamic tags will be created as
     needed and older dynamic tags will be omitted.  If you specify
     ‘--disable-new-dtags’, no new dynamic tags will be created.  By
     default, the new dynamic tags are not created.  Note that those
     options are only available for ELF systems.

‘--hash-size=NUMBER’
     Set the default size of the linker’s hash tables to a prime number
     close to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
     time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
     increasing the linker’s memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
     this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
     speed.

‘--hash-style=STYLE’
     Set the type of linker’s hash table(s).  STYLE can be either ‘sysv’
     for classic ELF ‘.hash’ section, ‘gnu’ for new style GNU
     ‘.gnu.hash’ section or ‘both’ for both the classic ELF ‘.hash’ and
     new style GNU ‘.gnu.hash’ hash tables.  The default depends upon
     how the linker was configured, but for most Linux based systems it
     will be ‘both’.

‘--compress-debug-sections=none’
‘--compress-debug-sections=zlib’
‘--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu’
‘--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi’
‘--compress-debug-sections=zstd’
     On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections
     are compressed using zlib.

     ‘--compress-debug-sections=none’ doesn’t compress DWARF debug
     sections.  ‘--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu’ compresses DWARF
     debug sections and renames them to begin with ‘.zdebug’ instead of
     ‘.debug’.  ‘--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi’ also compresses
     DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it sets the
     SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections’ headers.

     The ‘--compress-debug-sections=zlib’ option is an alias for
     ‘--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi’.

     ‘--compress-debug-sections=zstd’ compresses DWARF debug sections
     using zstd.

     Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
     sections, so if a binary is linked with
     ‘--compress-debug-sections=none’ for example, then any compressed
     debug sections in input files will be uncompressed before they are
     copied into the output binary.

     The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
     involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain.
     The default can be determined by examining the output from the
     linker’s ‘--help’ option.

‘--reduce-memory-overheads’
     This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
     expense of linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old
     O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
     O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.

     Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
     to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
     linker’s run time.  This is not done however if the ‘--hash-size’
     switch has been used.

     The ‘--reduce-memory-overheads’ switch may be also be used to
     enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.

‘--max-cache-size=SIZE’
     ‘ld’ normally caches the relocation information and symbol tables
     of input files in memory with the unlimited size.  This option sets
     the maximum cache size to SIZE.

‘--build-id’
‘--build-id=STYLE’
     Request the creation of a ‘.note.gnu.build-id’ ELF note section or
     a ‘.buildid’ COFF section.  The contents of the note are unique
     bits identifying this linked file.  STYLE can be ‘uuid’ to use 128
     random bits, ‘sha1’ to use a 160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative
     parts of the output contents, ‘md5’ to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on
     the normative parts of the output contents, or ‘0xHEXSTRING’ to use
     a chosen bit string specified as an even number of hexadecimal
     digits (‘-’ and ‘:’ characters between digit pairs are ignored).
     If STYLE is omitted, ‘sha1’ is used.

     The ‘md5’ and ‘sha1’ styles produces an identifier that is always
     the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all
     nonidentical output files.  It is not intended to be compared as a
     checksum for the file’s contents.  A linked file may be changed
     later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the
     original linked file does not change.

     Passing ‘none’ for STYLE disables the setting from any ‘--build-id’
     options earlier on the command line.

‘--package-metadata=JSON’
     Request the creation of a ‘.note.package’ ELF note section.  The
     contents of the note are in JSON format, as per the package
     metadata specification.  For more information see:
     https://systemd.io/ELF_PACKAGE_METADATA/ If the JSON argument is
     missing/empty then this will disable the creation of the metadata
     note, if one had been enabled by an earlier occurrence of the
     –package-metadata option.  If the linker has been built with
     libjansson, then the JSON string will be validated.

2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
-----------------------------------------

The i386 PE linker supports the ‘-shared’ option, which causes the
output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
executable.  You should name the output ‘*.dll’ when you use this
option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard ‘*.def’
files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).

   In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386 PE
target.  Options that take values may be separated from their values by
either a space or an equals sign.

‘--add-stdcall-alias’
     If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
     as-is and also with the suffix stripped.  [This option is specific
     to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]

‘--base-file FILE’
     Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
     of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with ‘dlltool’.
     [This is an i386 PE specific option]

‘--dll’
     Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
     ‘-shared’ or specify a ‘LIBRARY’ in a given ‘.def’ file.  [This
     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]

‘--enable-long-section-names’
‘--disable-long-section-names’
     The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that
     permits the use of section names longer than eight characters, the
     normal limit for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in
     object files, as fully-linked executable images do not carry the
     COFF string table required to support the longer names.  As a GNU
     extension, it is possible to allow their use in executable images
     as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)  disallow it in object
     files, by using these two options.  Executable images generated
     with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
     as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when
     examined with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and
     dumpers.  However, GDB relies on the use of PE long section names
     to find Dwarf-2 debug information sections in an executable image
     at runtime, and so if neither option is specified on the
     command-line, ‘ld’ will enable long section names, overriding the
     default and technically correct behaviour, when it finds the
     presence of debug information while linking an executable image and
     not stripping symbols.  [This option is valid for all PE targeted
     ports of the linker]

‘--enable-stdcall-fixup’
‘--disable-stdcall-fixup’
     If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
     to do “fuzzy linking” by looking for another defined symbol that
     differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
     and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For example,
     the undefined symbol ‘_foo’ might be linked to the function
     ‘_foo@12’, or the undefined symbol ‘_bar@16’ might be linked to the
     function ‘_bar’.  When the linker does this, it prints a warning,
     since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes import
     libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature to
     be usable.  If you specify ‘--enable-stdcall-fixup’, this feature
     is fully enabled and warnings are not printed.  If you specify
     ‘--disable-stdcall-fixup’, this feature is disabled and such
     mismatches are considered to be errors.  [This option is specific
     to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]

‘--leading-underscore’
‘--no-leading-underscore’
     For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is
     defined in target’s description.  By this option it is possible to
     disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.

‘--export-all-symbols’
     If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
     will be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
     otherwise wouldn’t be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
     explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
     function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
     unless this option is given.  Note that the symbols ‘DllMain@12’,
     ‘DllEntryPoint@0’, ‘DllMainCRTStartup@12’, and ‘impure_ptr’ will
     not be automatically exported.  Also, symbols imported from other
     DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL’s
     internal layout such as those beginning with ‘_head_’ or ending
     with ‘_iname’.  In addition, no symbols from ‘libgcc’, ‘libstd++’,
     ‘libmingw32’, or ‘crtX.o’ will be exported.  Symbols whose names
     begin with ‘__rtti_’ or ‘__builtin_’ will not be exported, to help
     with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an extensive list of
     cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously, this
     applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).  These
     cygwin-excludes are: ‘_cygwin_dll_entry@12’,
     ‘_cygwin_crt0_common@8’, ‘_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12’,
     ‘_fmode’, ‘_impure_ptr’, ‘cygwin_attach_dll’, ‘cygwin_premain0’,
     ‘cygwin_premain1’, ‘cygwin_premain2’, ‘cygwin_premain3’, and
     ‘environ’.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
     of the linker]

‘--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...’
     Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
     exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
     linker]

‘--exclude-all-symbols’
     Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.  [This
     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]

‘--file-alignment’
     Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always begin
     at file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This defaults
     to 512.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
     the linker]

‘--heap RESERVE’
‘--heap RESERVE,COMMIT’
     Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
     commit) to be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1MB
     reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
     targeted port of the linker]

‘--image-base VALUE’
     Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll.  This is the
     lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
     is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
     of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
     overlap any other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables,
     and 0x10000000 for dlls.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
     targeted port of the linker]

‘--kill-at’
     If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
     before they are exported.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
     targeted port of the linker]

‘--large-address-aware’
     If given, the appropriate bit in the “Characteristics” field of the
     COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
     virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used in
     conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in the
     “[operating systems]” section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit
     has no effect.  [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of
     the linker]

‘--disable-large-address-aware’
     Reverts the effect of a previous ‘--large-address-aware’ option.
     This is useful if ‘--large-address-aware’ is always set by the
     compiler driver (e.g.  Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not
     support virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  [This option
     is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]

‘--major-image-version VALUE’
     Sets the major number of the “image version”.  Defaults to 1.
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
     linker]

‘--major-os-version VALUE’
     Sets the major number of the “os version”.  Defaults to 4.  [This
     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]

‘--major-subsystem-version VALUE’
     Sets the major number of the “subsystem version”.  Defaults to 4.
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
     linker]

‘--minor-image-version VALUE’
     Sets the minor number of the “image version”.  Defaults to 0.
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
     linker]

‘--minor-os-version VALUE’
     Sets the minor number of the “os version”.  Defaults to 0.  [This
     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]

‘--minor-subsystem-version VALUE’
     Sets the minor number of the “subsystem version”.  Defaults to 0.
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
     linker]

‘--output-def FILE’
     The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
     corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
     (which should be called ‘*.def’) may be used to create an import
     library with ‘dlltool’ or may be used as a reference to
     automatically or implicitly exported symbols.  [This option is
     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]

‘--enable-auto-image-base’
‘--enable-auto-image-base=VALUE’
     Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting
     with base VALUE, unless one is specified using the ‘--image-base’
     argument.  By using a hash generated from the dllname to create
     unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory collisions and
     relocations which can delay program execution are avoided.  [This
     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]

‘--disable-auto-image-base’
     Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
     user-specified image base (‘--image-base’) then use the platform
     default.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
     the linker]

‘--dll-search-prefix STRING’
     When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library, search
     for ‘<string><basename>.dll’ in preference to ‘lib<basename>.dll’.
     This behaviour allows easy distinction between DLLs built for the
     various "subplatforms": native, cygwin, uwin, pw, etc.  For
     instance, cygwin DLLs typically use ‘--dll-search-prefix=cyg’.
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
     linker]

‘--enable-auto-import’
     Do sophisticated linking of ‘_symbol’ to ‘__imp__symbol’ for DATA
     imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
     mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
     linker]

     The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
     feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.

     Note: Use of the ’auto-import’ extension will cause the text
     section of the image file to be made writable.  This does not
     conform to the PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.

     Note - use of the ’auto-import’ extension will also cause read only
     data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
     placed into the .data section instead.  This is in order to work
     around a problem with consts that is described here:
     http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html

     Using ’auto-import’ generally will ’just work’ – but sometimes you
     may see this message:

     "variable ’<var>’ can’t be auto-imported.  Please read the
     documentation for ld’s ‘--enable-auto-import’ for details."

     This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
     ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
     only allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses
     to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
     as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
     DLL. Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
     trigger this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact
     data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect
     it, issue the warning, and exit.

     There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
     the data type of the exported variable:

     One way is to use –enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch.  This leaves
     the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
     environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
     supports this feature.

     A second solution is to force one of the ’constants’ to be a
     variable – that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
     For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
     array’s address) a variable, or b) make the ’constant’ index a
     variable.  Thus:

          extern type extern_array[];
          extern_array[1] -->
             { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }

     or

          extern type extern_array[];
          extern_array[1] -->
             { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }

     For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
     is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
     variable:

          extern struct s extern_struct;
          extern_struct.field -->
             { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }

     or

          extern long long extern_ll;
          extern_ll -->
            { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }

     A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
     ’auto-import’ for the offending symbol and mark it with
     ‘__declspec(dllimport)’.  However, in practice that requires using
     compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
     building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
     building/linking to a static library.  In making the choice between
     the various methods of resolving the ’direct address with constant
     offset’ problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:

     Original:
          --foo.h
          extern int arr[];
          --foo.c
          #include "foo.h"
          void main(int argc, char **argv){
            printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
          }

     Solution 1:
          --foo.h
          extern int arr[];
          --foo.c
          #include "foo.h"
          void main(int argc, char **argv){
            /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
            volatile int *parr = arr;
            printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
          }

     Solution 2:
          --foo.h
          /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
          #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
            !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
          #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
          #else
          #define FOO_IMPORT
          #endif
          extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
          --foo.c
          #include "foo.h"
          void main(int argc, char **argv){
            printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
          }

     A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
     use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
     offending variables (e.g.  set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
     functions).

‘--disable-auto-import’
     Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of ‘_symbol’ to
     ‘__imp__symbol’ for DATA imports from DLLs.  [This option is
     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]

‘--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc’
     If your code contains expressions described in –enable-auto-import
     section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
     switch will create a vector of ’runtime pseudo relocations’ which
     can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
     data in your client code.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
     targeted port of the linker]

‘--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc’
     Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
     from DLLs.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
     of the linker]

‘--enable-extra-pe-debug’
     Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
     linker]

‘--section-alignment’
     Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin
     at addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to
     0x1000.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
     the linker]

‘--stack RESERVE’
‘--stack RESERVE,COMMIT’
     Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
     commit) to be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2MB
     reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
     targeted port of the linker]

‘--subsystem WHICH’
‘--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR’
‘--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR’
     Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
     legal values for WHICH are ‘native’, ‘windows’, ‘console’, ‘posix’,
     and ‘xbox’.  You may optionally set the subsystem version also.
     Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH.  [This option is
     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]

     The following options set flags in the ‘DllCharacteristics’ field
     of the PE file header: [These options are specific to PE targeted
     ports of the linker]

‘--high-entropy-va’
‘--disable-high-entropy-va’
     Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
     (ASLR). This option is enabled by default for 64-bit PE images.

     This option also implies ‘--dynamicbase’ and
     ‘--enable-reloc-section’.

‘--dynamicbase’
‘--disable-dynamicbase’
     The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
     randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
     Vista for i386 PE targets.  This option is enabled by default but
     can be disabled via the ‘--disable-dynamicbase’ option.  This
     option also implies ‘--enable-reloc-section’.

‘--forceinteg’
‘--disable-forceinteg’
     Code integrity checks are enforced.  This option is disabled by
     default.

‘--nxcompat’
‘--disable-nxcompat’
     The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.  This
     feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
     The option is enabled by default.

‘--no-isolation’
‘--disable-no-isolation’
     Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
     This option is disabled by default.

‘--no-seh’
‘--disable-no-seh’
     The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from this
     image.  This option is disabled by default.

‘--no-bind’
‘--disable-no-bind’
     Do not bind this image.  This option is disabled by default.

‘--wdmdriver’
‘--disable-wdmdriver’
     The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.  This option is
     disabled by default.

‘--tsaware’
‘--disable-tsaware’
     The image is Terminal Server aware.  This option is disabled by
     default.

‘--insert-timestamp’
‘--no-insert-timestamp’
     Insert a real timestamp into the image.  This is the default
     behaviour as it matches legacy code and it means that the image
     will work with other, proprietary tools.  The problem with this
     default is that it will result in slightly different images being
     produced each time the same sources are linked.  The option
     ‘--no-insert-timestamp’ can be used to insert a zero value for the
     timestamp, this ensuring that binaries produced from identical
     sources will compare identically.

     If ‘--insert-timestamp’ is active then the time inserted is either
     the time that the linking takes place or, if the
     ‘SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH’ environment variable is defined, the number of
     seconds since Unix epoch as specified by that variable.

‘--enable-reloc-section’
‘--disable-reloc-section’
     Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
     is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE
     header.  This option is enabled by default.

2.1.2 Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
---------------------------------------------

The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support
shared libraries.  Each shared library in the system needs to have a
unique index; all executables use an index of 0.

‘--dsbt-size SIZE’
     This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current
     executable or shared library to SIZE.  The default is to create a
     table with 64 entries.

‘--dsbt-index INDEX’
     This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared
     library to INDEX.  The default is 0, which is appropriate for
     generating executables.  If a shared library is generated with a
     DSBT index of 0, the ‘R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX’ relocs are copied into
     the output file.

     The ‘--no-merge-exidx-entries’ switch disables the merging of
     adjacent exidx entries in frame unwind info.

2.1.3 Options specific to C-SKY targets
---------------------------------------

‘--branch-stub’
     This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch
     stub sections when needed to extend the range of branches.  This
     option is usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call
     instructions that can access the full memory range and branch
     relaxation is normally handled by the compiler or assembler.

‘--stub-group-size=N’
     This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
     It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can be
     handled by one stub section.  A negative value of N locates stub
     sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
     sections to appear either before or after the branches.  Values of
     ‘1’ or ‘-1’ indicate that the linker should choose suitable
     defaults.

2.1.4 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
------------------------------------------------------------

The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.

‘--no-trampoline’
     This option disables the generation of trampoline.  By default a
     trampoline is generated for each far function which is called using
     a ‘jsr’ instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function
     is taken).

‘--bank-window NAME’
     This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
     in the ‘MEMORY’ specification that describes the memory bank
     window.  The definition of such region is then used by the linker
     to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.

2.1.5 Options specific to Motorola 68K target
---------------------------------------------

The following options are supported to control handling of GOT
generation when linking for 68K targets.

‘--got=TYPE’
     This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
     TYPE should be one of ‘single’, ‘negative’, ‘multigot’ or ‘target’.
     For more information refer to the Info entry for ‘ld’.

2.1.6 Options specific to MIPS targets
--------------------------------------

The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
linking for MIPS targets.

‘--insn32’
‘--no-insn32’
     These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in
     code generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy
     binding stubs, or in relaxation.  If ‘--insn32’ is used, then the
     linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings.  By default or if
     ‘--no-insn32’ is used, all instruction encodings are used,
     including 16-bit ones where possible.

‘--ignore-branch-isa’
‘--no-ignore-branch-isa’
     These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
     transitions.  If ‘--ignore-branch-isa’ is used, then the linker
     accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
     is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of ‘BAL’
     instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
     equivalent ‘JALX’ instructions as the associated relocation is
     calculated.  By default or if ‘--no-ignore-branch-isa’ is used a
     check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
     an error.

‘--compact-branches’
‘--no-compact-branches’
     These options control the generation of compact instructions by the
     linker in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.

2.1.7 Options specific to PDP11 targets
---------------------------------------

For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
produced as selected by the following options.  The default variant for
pdp11-aout is the ‘--omagic’ option, whereas for other targets
‘--nmagic’ is the default.  The ‘--imagic’ option is defined only for
the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described here as they apply
to the pdp11-aout target.

‘-N’
‘--omagic’

     Mark the output as ‘OMAGIC’ (0407) in the ‘a.out’ header to
     indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
     shared.  Since the text and data sections are both readable and
     writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous
     after the text segment.  This is the oldest format for PDP11
     executable programs and is the default for ‘ld’ on PDP11 Unix
     systems from the beginning through 2.11BSD.

‘-n’
‘--nmagic’

     Mark the output as ‘NMAGIC’ (0410) in the ‘a.out’ header to
     indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion
     will be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the
     same file.  This involves moving the data areas up to the first
     possible 8K byte page boundary following the end of the text.  This
     option creates a _pure executable_ format.

‘-z’
‘--imagic’

     Mark the output as ‘IMAGIC’ (0411) in the ‘a.out’ header to
     indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text
     and data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using
     the split instruction and data space feature of the memory
     management unit in larger models of the PDP11.  This doubles the
     address space available to the program.  The text segment is again
     pure, write-protected, and shareable.  The only difference in the
     output format between this option and the others, besides the magic
     number, is that both the text and data sections start at location
     0.  The ‘-z’ option selected this format in 2.11BSD. This option
     creates a _separate executable_ format.

‘--no-omagic’

     Equivalent to ‘--nmagic’ for pdp11-aout.


File: ld.info,  Node: Environment,  Prev: Options,  Up: Invocation

2.2 Environment Variables
=========================

You can change the behaviour of ‘ld’ with the environment variables
‘GNUTARGET’, ‘LDEMULATION’ and ‘COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE’.

   ‘GNUTARGET’ determines the input-file object format if you don’t use
‘-b’ (or its synonym ‘--format’).  Its value should be one of the BFD
names for an input format (*note BFD::).  If there is no ‘GNUTARGET’ in
the environment, ‘ld’ uses the natural format of the target.  If
‘GNUTARGET’ is set to ‘default’ then BFD attempts to discover the input
format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.

   ‘LDEMULATION’ determines the default emulation if you don’t use the
‘-m’ option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
available emulations with the ‘--verbose’ or ‘-V’ options.  If the ‘-m’
option is not used, and the ‘LDEMULATION’ environment variable is not
defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
configured.

   Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
‘COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE’ is set in the environment, then it will default to
not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in a similar
fashion by the ‘gcc’ linker wrapper program.  The default may be
overridden by the ‘--demangle’ and ‘--no-demangle’ options.


File: ld.info,  Node: Scripts,  Next: Plugins,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top

3 Linker Scripts
****************

Every link is controlled by a “linker script”.  This script is written
in the linker command language.

   The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections
in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts do nothing
more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script can also
direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
described below.

   The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
linker executable.  You can use the ‘--verbose’ command-line option to
display the default linker script.  Certain command-line options, such
as ‘-r’ or ‘-N’, will affect the default linker script.

   You may supply your own linker script by using the ‘-T’ command line
option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
linker script.

   You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  *Note
Implicit Linker Scripts::.

* Menu:

* Basic Script Concepts::	Basic Linker Script Concepts
* Script Format::		Linker Script Format
* Simple Example::		Simple Linker Script Example
* Simple Commands::		Simple Linker Script Commands
* Assignments::			Assigning Values to Symbols
* SECTIONS::			SECTIONS Command
* MEMORY::			MEMORY Command
* PHDRS::			PHDRS Command
* VERSION::			VERSION Command
* Expressions::			Expressions in Linker Scripts
* Implicit Linker Scripts::	Implicit Linker Scripts


File: ld.info,  Node: Basic Script Concepts,  Next: Script Format,  Up: Scripts

3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
================================

We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
describe the linker script language.

   The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The
output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
“object file format”.  Each file is called an “object file”.  The output
file is often called an “executable”, but for our purposes we will also
call it an object file.  Each object file has, among other things, a
list of “sections”.  We sometimes refer to a section in an input file as
an “input section”; similarly, a section in the output file is an
“output section”.

   Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
also have an associated block of data, known as the “section contents”.
A section may be marked as “loadable”, which means that the contents
should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.  A section
with no contents may be “allocatable”, which means that an area in
memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section which
is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
debugging information.

   Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
first is the “VMA”, or virtual memory address.  This is the address the
section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the “LMA”,
or load memory address.  This is the address at which the section will
be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the same.  An
example of when they might be different is when a data section is loaded
into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up (this
technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM based
system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the RAM
address would be the VMA.

   You can see the sections in an object file by using the ‘objdump’
program with the ‘-h’ option.

   Every object file also has a list of “symbols”, known as the “symbol
table”.  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol has a name,
and each defined symbol has an address, among other information.  If you
compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a defined
symbol for every defined function and global or static variable.  Every
undefined function or global variable which is referenced in the input
file will become an undefined symbol.

   You can see the symbols in an object file by using the ‘nm’ program,
or by using the ‘objdump’ program with the ‘-t’ option.


File: ld.info,  Node: Script Format,  Next: Simple Example,  Prev: Basic Script Concepts,  Up: Scripts

3.2 Linker Script Format
========================

Linker scripts are text files.

   You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
generally ignored.

   Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
directly.  If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
in double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
file name.

   You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
‘/*’ and ‘*/’.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
whitespace.


File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Example,  Next: Simple Commands,  Prev: Script Format,  Up: Scripts

3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
================================

Many linker scripts are fairly simple.

   The simplest possible linker script has just one command: ‘SECTIONS’.
You use the ‘SECTIONS’ command to describe the memory layout of the
output file.

   The ‘SECTIONS’ command is a powerful command.  Here we will describe
a simple use of it.  Let’s assume your program consists only of code,
initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the ‘.text’,
‘.data’, and ‘.bss’ sections, respectively.  Let’s assume further that
these are the only sections which appear in your input files.

   For this example, let’s say that the code should be loaded at address
0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
linker script which will do that:
     SECTIONS
     {
       . = 0x10000;
       .text : { *(.text) }
       . = 0x8000000;
       .data : { *(.data) }
       .bss : { *(.bss) }
     }

   You write the ‘SECTIONS’ command as the keyword ‘SECTIONS’, followed
by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
enclosed in curly braces.

   The first line inside the ‘SECTIONS’ command of the above example
sets the value of the special symbol ‘.’, which is the location counter.
If you do not specify the address of an output section in some other way
(other ways are described later), the address is set from the current
value of the location counter.  The location counter is then incremented
by the size of the output section.  At the start of the ‘SECTIONS’
command, the location counter has the value ‘0’.

   The second line defines an output section, ‘.text’.  The colon is
required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
which should be placed into this output section.  The ‘*’ is a wildcard
which matches any file name.  The expression ‘*(.text)’ means all
‘.text’ input sections in all input files.

   Since the location counter is ‘0x10000’ when the output section
‘.text’ is defined, the linker will set the address of the ‘.text’
section in the output file to be ‘0x10000’.

   The remaining lines define the ‘.data’ and ‘.bss’ sections in the
output file.  The linker will place the ‘.data’ output section at
address ‘0x8000000’.  After the linker places the ‘.data’ output
section, the value of the location counter will be ‘0x8000000’ plus the
size of the ‘.data’ output section.  The effect is that the linker will
place the ‘.bss’ output section immediately after the ‘.data’ output
section in memory.

   The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
example, the specified addresses for the ‘.text’ and ‘.data’ sections
will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may have
to create a small gap between the ‘.data’ and ‘.bss’ sections.

   That’s it!  That’s a simple and complete linker script.


File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Commands,  Next: Assignments,  Prev: Simple Example,  Up: Scripts

3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
=================================

In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.

* Menu:

* Entry Point::			Setting the entry point
* File Commands::		Commands dealing with files
* Format Commands::		Commands dealing with object file formats

* REGION_ALIAS::		Assign alias names to memory regions
* Miscellaneous Commands::	Other linker script commands


File: ld.info,  Node: Entry Point,  Next: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands

3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
-----------------------------

The first instruction to execute in a program is called the “entry
point”.  You can use the ‘ENTRY’ linker script command to set the entry
point.  The argument is a symbol name:
     ENTRY(SYMBOL)

   There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set
the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
stopping when one of them succeeds:
   • the ‘-e’ ENTRY command-line option;
   • the ‘ENTRY(SYMBOL)’ command in a linker script;
   • the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
     targets this is ‘start’, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
     check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one
     found.
   • the address of the first byte of the code section, if present and
     an executable is being created - the code section is usually
     ‘.text’, but can be something else;
   • The address ‘0’.


File: ld.info,  Node: File Commands,  Next: Format Commands,  Prev: Entry Point,  Up: Simple Commands

3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
---------------------------------

Several linker script commands deal with files.

‘INCLUDE FILENAME’
     Include the linker script FILENAME at this point.  The file will be
     searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
     specified with the ‘-L’ option.  You can nest calls to ‘INCLUDE’ up
     to 10 levels deep.

     You can place ‘INCLUDE’ directives at the top level, in ‘MEMORY’ or
     ‘SECTIONS’ commands, or in output section descriptions.

‘INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)’
‘INPUT(FILE FILE ...)’
     The ‘INPUT’ command directs the linker to include the named files
     in the link, as though they were named on the command line.

     For example, if you always want to include ‘subr.o’ any time you do
     a link, but you can’t be bothered to put it on every link command
     line, then you can put ‘INPUT (subr.o)’ in your linker script.

     In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
     linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a ‘-T’
     option.

     In case a “sysroot prefix” is configured, and the filename starts
     with the ‘/’ character, and the script being processed was located
     inside the “sysroot prefix”, the filename will be looked for in the
     “sysroot prefix”.  The “sysroot prefix” can also be forced by
     specifying ‘=’ as the first character in the filename path, or
     prefixing the filename path with ‘$SYSROOT’.  See also the
     description of ‘-L’ in *note Command-line Options: Options.

     If a “sysroot prefix” is not used then the linker will try to open
     the file in the directory containing the linker script.  If it is
     not found the linker will then search the current directory.  If it
     is still not found the linker will search through the archive
     library search path.

     If you use ‘INPUT (-lFILE)’, ‘ld’ will transform the name to
     ‘libFILE.a’, as with the command-line argument ‘-l’.

     When you use the ‘INPUT’ command in an implicit linker script, the
     files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
     script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.

‘GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)’
‘GROUP(FILE FILE ...)’
     The ‘GROUP’ command is like ‘INPUT’, except that the named files
     should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
     new undefined references are created.  See the description of ‘-(’
     in *note Command-line Options: Options.

‘AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)’
‘AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)’
     This construct can appear only inside of the ‘INPUT’ or ‘GROUP’
     commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
     as if they appear directly in the ‘INPUT’ or ‘GROUP’ commands, with
     the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only when
     they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
     ‘--as-needed’ option for all the files listed inside of it and
     restores previous ‘--as-needed’ resp.  ‘--no-as-needed’ setting
     afterwards.

‘OUTPUT(FILENAME)’
     The ‘OUTPUT’ command names the output file.  Using
     ‘OUTPUT(FILENAME)’ in the linker script is exactly like using ‘-o
     FILENAME’ on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
     Options.).  If both are used, the command-line option takes
     precedence.

     You can use the ‘OUTPUT’ command to define a default name for the
     output file other than the usual default of ‘a.out’.

‘SEARCH_DIR(PATH)’
     The ‘SEARCH_DIR’ command adds PATH to the list of paths where ‘ld’
     looks for archive libraries.  Using ‘SEARCH_DIR(PATH)’ is exactly
     like using ‘-L PATH’ on the command line (*note Command-line
     Options: Options.).  If both are used, then the linker will search
     both paths.  Paths specified using the command-line option are
     searched first.

‘STARTUP(FILENAME)’
     The ‘STARTUP’ command is just like the ‘INPUT’ command, except that
     FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as though
     it were specified first on the command line.  This may be useful
     when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of
     the first file.


File: ld.info,  Node: Format Commands,  Next: REGION_ALIAS,  Prev: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands

3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
-----------------------------------------------

A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.

‘OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)’
‘OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)’
     The ‘OUTPUT_FORMAT’ command names the BFD format to use for the
     output file (*note BFD::).  Using ‘OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)’ is
     exactly like using ‘--oformat BFDNAME’ on the command line (*note
     Command-line Options: Options.).  If both are used, the command
     line option takes precedence.

     You can use ‘OUTPUT_FORMAT’ with three arguments to use different
     formats based on the ‘-EB’ and ‘-EL’ command-line options.  This
     permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
     desired endianness.

     If neither ‘-EB’ nor ‘-EL’ are used, then the output format will be
     the first argument, DEFAULT.  If ‘-EB’ is used, the output format
     will be the second argument, BIG.  If ‘-EL’ is used, the output
     format will be the third argument, LITTLE.

     For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses
     this command:
          OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
     This says that the default format for the output file is
     ‘elf32-bigmips’, but if the user uses the ‘-EL’ command-line
     option, the output file will be created in the ‘elf32-littlemips’
     format.

‘TARGET(BFDNAME)’
     The ‘TARGET’ command names the BFD format to use when reading input
     files.  It affects subsequent ‘INPUT’ and ‘GROUP’ commands.  This
     command is like using ‘-b BFDNAME’ on the command line (*note
     Command-line Options: Options.).  If the ‘TARGET’ command is used
     but ‘OUTPUT_FORMAT’ is not, then the last ‘TARGET’ command is also
     used to set the format for the output file.  *Note BFD::.


File: ld.info,  Node: REGION_ALIAS,  Next: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Format Commands,  Up: Simple Commands

3.4.4 Assign alias names to memory regions
------------------------------------------

Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
*note MEMORY:: command.  Each name corresponds to at most one memory
region.

     REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION)

   The ‘REGION_ALIAS’ function creates an alias name ALIAS for the
memory region REGION.  This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
to memory regions.  An example follows.

   Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with
various memory storage devices.  All have a general purpose, volatile
memory ‘RAM’ that allows code execution or data storage.  Some may have
a read-only, non-volatile memory ‘ROM’ that allows code execution and
read-only data access.  The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile
memory ‘ROM2’ with read-only data access and no code execution
capability.  We have four output sections:

   • ‘.text’ program code;
   • ‘.rodata’ read-only data;
   • ‘.data’ read-write initialized data;
   • ‘.bss’ read-write zero initialized data.

   The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system
independent part defining the output sections and a system dependent
part mapping the output sections to the memory regions available on the
system.  Our embedded systems come with three different memory setups
‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’:
Section            Variant A          Variant B          Variant C
.text              RAM                ROM                ROM
.rodata            RAM                ROM                ROM2
.data              RAM                RAM/ROM            RAM/ROM2
.bss               RAM                RAM                RAM
   The notation ‘RAM/ROM’ or ‘RAM/ROM2’ means that this section is
loaded into region ‘ROM’ or ‘ROM2’ respectively.  Please note that the
load address of the ‘.data’ section starts in all three variants at the
end of the ‘.rodata’ section.

   The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows.
It includes the system dependent ‘linkcmds.memory’ file that describes
the memory layout:
     INCLUDE linkcmds.memory

     SECTIONS
       {
         .text :
           {
             *(.text)
           } > REGION_TEXT
         .rodata :
           {
             *(.rodata)
             rodata_end = .;
           } > REGION_RODATA
         .data : AT (rodata_end)
           {
             data_start = .;
             *(.data)
           } > REGION_DATA
         data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
         data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
         .bss :
           {
             *(.bss)
           } > REGION_BSS
       }

   Now we need three different ‘linkcmds.memory’ files to define memory
regions and alias names.  The content of ‘linkcmds.memory’ for the three
variants ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’:
‘A’
     Here everything goes into the ‘RAM’.
          MEMORY
            {
              RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
            }

          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
‘B’
     Program code and read-only data go into the ‘ROM’.  Read-write data
     goes into the ‘RAM’.  An image of the initialized data is loaded
     into the ‘ROM’ and will be copied during system start into the
     ‘RAM’.
          MEMORY
            {
              ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
              RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
            }

          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
‘C’
     Program code goes into the ‘ROM’.  Read-only data goes into the
     ‘ROM2’.  Read-write data goes into the ‘RAM’.  An image of the
     initialized data is loaded into the ‘ROM2’ and will be copied
     during system start into the ‘RAM’.
          MEMORY
            {
              ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
              ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
              RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
            }

          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);

   It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to
copy the ‘.data’ section from ‘ROM’ or ‘ROM2’ into the ‘RAM’ if
necessary:
     #include <string.h>

     extern char data_start [];
     extern char data_size [];
     extern char data_load_start [];

     void copy_data(void)
     {
       if (data_start != data_load_start)
         {
           memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
         }
     }


File: ld.info,  Node: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: REGION_ALIAS,  Up: Simple Commands

3.4.5 Other Linker Script Commands
----------------------------------

There are a few other linker scripts commands.

‘ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)’
     Ensure that EXP is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
     with an error code, and print MESSAGE.

     Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
     take place.  This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
     inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
     for those symbols.  The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
     symbols that just reference dot.  Thus an assertion like this:

            .stack :
            {
              PROVIDE (__stack = .);
              PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
              ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
            }

     will fail if ‘__stack_size’ is not defined elsewhere.  Symbols
     PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so
     they can be used inside ASSERTions.  Thus:

            PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
            .stack :
            {
              PROVIDE (__stack = .);
              ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
            }

     will work.

‘EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)’
     Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
     symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
     modules from standard libraries.  You may list several SYMBOLs for
     each ‘EXTERN’, and you may use ‘EXTERN’ multiple times.  This
     command has the same effect as the ‘-u’ command-line option.

‘FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION’
     This command has the same effect as the ‘-d’ command-line option:
     to make ‘ld’ assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
     output file is specified (‘-r’).

‘INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION’
     This command has the same effect as the ‘--no-define-common’
     command-line option: to make ‘ld’ omit the assignment of addresses
     to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.

‘FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION’
     This command has the same effect as the ‘--force-group-allocation’
     command-line option: to make ‘ld’ place section group members like
     normal input sections, and to delete the section groups even if a
     relocatable output file is specified (‘-r’).

‘INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION’
     This command is typically used in a script specified by ‘-T’ to
     augment the default ‘SECTIONS’ with, for example, overlays.  It
     inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
     OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes ‘-T’ to not override the default
     linker script.  The exact insertion point is as for orphan
     sections.  *Note Location Counter::.  The insertion happens after
     the linker has mapped input sections to output sections.  Prior to
     the insertion, since ‘-T’ scripts are parsed before the default
     linker script, statements in the ‘-T’ script occur before the
     default linker script statements in the internal linker
     representation of the script.  In particular, input section
     assignments will be made to ‘-T’ output sections before those in
     the default script.  Here is an example of how a ‘-T’ script using
     ‘INSERT’ might look:

          SECTIONS
          {
            OVERLAY :
            {
              .ov1 { ov1*(.text) }
              .ov2 { ov2*(.text) }
            }
          }
          INSERT AFTER .text;

     Note that when ‘-T’ is used twice, once to override the default
     script and once to augment that script using ‘INSERT’ the order of
     parsing and section assignments apply as for the default script.
     The script with ‘INSERT’ should be specified _first_ on the command
     line.

‘NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)’
     This command may be used to tell ‘ld’ to issue an error about any
     references among certain output sections.

     In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
     using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
     section will not be.  Any direct references between the two
     sections would be errors.  For example, it would be an error if
     code in one section called a function defined in the other section.

     The ‘NOCROSSREFS’ command takes a list of output section names.  If
     ‘ld’ detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
     an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
     ‘NOCROSSREFS’ command uses output section names, not input section
     names.

‘NOCROSSREFS_TO(TOSECTION FROMSECTION ...)’
     This command may be used to tell ‘ld’ to issue an error about any
     references to one section from a list of other sections.

     The ‘NOCROSSREFS’ command is useful when ensuring that two or more
     output sections are entirely independent but there are situations
     where a one-way dependency is needed.  For example, in a multi-core
     application there may be shared code that can be called from each
     core but for safety must never call back.

     The ‘NOCROSSREFS_TO’ command takes a list of output section names.
     The first section can not be referenced from any of the other
     sections.  If ‘ld’ detects any references to the first section from
     any of the other sections, it reports an error and returns a
     non-zero exit status.  Note that the ‘NOCROSSREFS_TO’ command uses
     output section names, not input section names.

‘OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)’
     Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is
     one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::).  You can
     see the architecture of an object file by using the ‘objdump’
     program with the ‘-f’ option.

‘LD_FEATURE(STRING)’
     This command may be used to modify ‘ld’ behavior.  If STRING is
     ‘"SANE_EXPR"’ then absolute symbols and numbers in a script are
     simply treated as numbers everywhere.  *Note Expression Section::.


File: ld.info,  Node: Assignments,  Next: SECTIONS,  Prev: Simple Commands,  Up: Scripts

3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
===============================

You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.

* Menu:

* Simple Assignments::		Simple Assignments
* HIDDEN::			HIDDEN
* PROVIDE::			PROVIDE
* PROVIDE_HIDDEN::		PROVIDE_HIDDEN
* Source Code Reference::	How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code


File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Assignments,  Next: HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments

3.5.1 Simple Assignments
------------------------

You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:

‘SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;’
‘SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;’
‘SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;’
‘SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;’
‘SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;’
‘SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;’
‘SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;’
‘SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;’
‘SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;’

   The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION.  In the
other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
adjusted accordingly.

   The special symbol name ‘.’ indicates the location counter.  You may
only use this within a ‘SECTIONS’ command.  *Note Location Counter::.

   The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.

   Expressions are defined below; see *note Expressions::.

   You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
as statements within a ‘SECTIONS’ command, or as part of an output
section description in a ‘SECTIONS’ command.

   The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
expression; for more information, see *note Expression Section::.

   Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
assignments may be used:

     floating_point = 0;
     SECTIONS
     {
       .text :
         {
           *(.text)
           _etext = .;
         }
       _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
       .data : { *(.data) }
     }
In this example, the symbol ‘floating_point’ will be defined as zero.
The symbol ‘_etext’ will be defined as the address following the last
‘.text’ input section.  The symbol ‘_bdata’ will be defined as the
address following the ‘.text’ output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
boundary.


File: ld.info,  Node: HIDDEN,  Next: PROVIDE,  Prev: Simple Assignments,  Up: Assignments

3.5.2 HIDDEN
------------

For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won’t be
exported.  The syntax is ‘HIDDEN(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)’.

   Here is the example from *note Simple Assignments::, rewritten to use
‘HIDDEN’:

     HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
     SECTIONS
     {
       .text :
         {
           *(.text)
           HIDDEN(_etext = .);
         }
       HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
       .data : { *(.data) }
     }
In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this
module.


File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE,  Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Prev: HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments

3.5.3 PROVIDE
-------------

In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol ‘etext’.
However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use ‘etext’ as a
function name without encountering an error.  The ‘PROVIDE’ keyword may
be used to define a symbol, such as ‘etext’, only if it is referenced
but not defined.  The syntax is ‘PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)’.

   Here is an example of using ‘PROVIDE’ to define ‘etext’:
     SECTIONS
     {
       .text :
         {
           *(.text)
           _etext = .;
           PROVIDE(etext = .);
         }
     }

   In this example, if the program defines ‘_etext’ (with a leading
underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition diagnostic.  If,
on the other hand, the program defines ‘etext’ (with no leading
underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
If the program references ‘etext’ but does not define it, the linker
will use the definition in the linker script.

   Note - the ‘PROVIDE’ directive considers a common symbol to be
defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
that the ‘PROVIDE’ would create.  This is particularly important when
considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
‘__CTOR_LIST__’ as these are often defined as common symbols.


File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Next: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments

3.5.4 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
--------------------

Similar to ‘PROVIDE’.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be hidden
and won’t be exported.


File: ld.info,  Node: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments

3.5.5 Source Code Reference
---------------------------

Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
that does not have a value.

   Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
transform names in the source code into different names when they are
stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive ‘name
mangling’.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of a
variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same variable
as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a linker script
variable might be referred to as:

       extern int foo;

   But in the linker script it might be defined as:

       _foo = 1000;

   In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
transformation has taken place.

   When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
the program’s memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol.  The second is
that the compiler creates an entry in the program’s symbol table which
holds the symbol’s _address_.  ie the symbol table contains the address
of the block of memory holding the symbol’s value.  So for example the
following C declaration, at file scope:

       int foo = 1000;

   creates an entry called ‘foo’ in the symbol table.  This entry holds
the address of an ‘int’ sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
initially stored.

   When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol’s
memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
So:

       foo = 1;

   looks up the symbol ‘foo’ in the symbol table, gets the address
associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
address.  Whereas:

       int * a = & foo;

   looks up the symbol ‘foo’ in the symbol table, gets its address and
then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
variable ‘a’.

   Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are an
address without a value.  So for example the linker script definition:

       foo = 1000;

   creates an entry in the symbol table called ‘foo’ which holds the
address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a linker
script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is access the
_address_ of a linker script defined symbol.

   Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt
to use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the contents of
a section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
linker script contains these declarations:

       start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
       end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
       start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;

   Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:

       extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;

       memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);

   Note the use of the ‘&’ operators.  These are correct.  Alternatively
the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or arrays and then
the code will again work as expected:

       extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];

       memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);

   Note how using this method does not require the use of ‘&’ operators.


File: ld.info,  Node: SECTIONS,  Next: MEMORY,  Prev: Assignments,  Up: Scripts

3.6 SECTIONS Command
====================

The ‘SECTIONS’ command tells the linker how to map input sections into
output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.

   The format of the ‘SECTIONS’ command is:
     SECTIONS
     {
       SECTIONS-COMMAND
       SECTIONS-COMMAND
       ...
     }

   Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:

   • an ‘ENTRY’ command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
   • a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   • an output section description
   • an overlay description

   The ‘ENTRY’ command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
‘SECTIONS’ command for convenience in using the location counter in
those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
the layout of the output file.

   Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
below.

   If you do not use a ‘SECTIONS’ command in your linker script, the
linker will place each input section into an identically named output
section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.

* Menu:

* Output Section Description::	Output section description
* Output Section Name::		Output section name
* Output Section Address::	Output section address
* Input Section::		Input section description
* Output Section Data::		Output section data
* Output Section Keywords::	Output section keywords
* Output Section Discarding::	Output section discarding
* Output Section Attributes::	Output section attributes
* Overlay Description::		Overlay description


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Description,  Next: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS

3.6.1 Output Section Description
--------------------------------

The full description of an output section looks like this:
     SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
       [AT(LMA)]
       [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
       [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
       [CONSTRAINT]
       {
         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
         ...
       } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP] [,]

   Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
attributes.

   The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.  The
comma at the end may be required if a FILLEXP is used and the next
SECTIONS-COMMAND looks like a continuation of the expression.  The line
breaks and other white space are optional.

   Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:

   • a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   • an input section description (*note Input Section::)
   • data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
   • a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Name,  Next: Output Section Address,  Prev: Output Section Description,  Up: SECTIONS

3.6.2 Output Section Name
-------------------------

The name of the output section is SECTION.  SECTION must meet the
constraints of your output format.  In formats which only support a
limited number of sections, such as ‘a.out’, the name must be one of the
names supported by the format (‘a.out’, for example, allows only
‘.text’, ‘.data’ or ‘.bss’).  If the output format supports any number
of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string.  A section name
may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains any
unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.

   The output section name ‘/DISCARD/’ is special; *note Output Section
Discarding::.


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Address,  Next: Input Section,  Prev: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS

3.6.3 Output Section Address
----------------------------

The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address) of
the output section.  This address is optional, but if it is provided
then the output address will be set exactly as specified.

   If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for
the section, based on the heuristic below.  This address will be
adjusted to fit the alignment requirement of the output section.  The
alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
contained within the output section.

   The output section address heuristic is as follows:

   • If an output memory REGION is set for the section then it is added
     to this region and its address will be the next free address in
     that region.

   • If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
     regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with
     the section is selected to contain it.  The section’s output
     address will be the next free address in that region; *note
     MEMORY::.

   • If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
     the output address will be based on the current value of the
     location counter.

For example:

     .text . : { *(.text) }

and

     .text : { *(.text) }

are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the ‘.text’
output section to the current value of the location counter.  The second
will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned to the
strictest alignment of any of the ‘.text’ input sections.

   The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *note Expressions::.  For
example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary, so
that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could do
something like this:
     .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
This works because ‘ALIGN’ returns the current location counter aligned
upward to the specified value.

   Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
location counter, provided that the section is non-empty.  (Empty
sections are ignored).


File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section,  Next: Output Section Data,  Prev: Output Section Address,  Up: SECTIONS

3.6.4 Input Section Description
-------------------------------

The most common output section command is an input section description.

   The input section description is the most basic linker script
operation.  You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
your program in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the
linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.

* Menu:

* Input Section Basics::	Input section basics
* Input Section Wildcards::	Input section wildcard patterns
* Input Section Common::	Input section for common symbols
* Input Section Keep::		Input section and garbage collection
* Input Section Example::	Input section example


File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Basics,  Next: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section

3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
............................

An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
by a list of section names in parentheses.

   The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).

   The most common input section description is to include all input
sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
include all input ‘.text’ sections, you would write:
     *(.text)
Here the ‘*’ is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude a
list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be
used to match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE
list.  For example:
     EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
will cause all .ctors sections from all files except ‘crtend.o’ and
‘otherfile.o’ to be included.  The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be placed
inside the section list, for example:
     *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
The result of this is identically to the previous example.  Supporting
two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
more than one section, as described below.

   There are two ways to include more than one section:
     *(.text .rdata)
     *(.text) *(.rdata)
The difference between these is the order in which the ‘.text’ and
‘.rdata’ input sections will appear in the output section.  In the first
example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as they
are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all ‘.text’ input
sections will appear first, followed by all ‘.rdata’ input sections.

   When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
immediately following section, for example:
     *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
will cause all ‘.text’ sections from all files except ‘somefile.o’ to be
included, while all ‘.rdata’ sections from all files, including
‘somefile.o’, will be included.  To exclude the ‘.rdata’ sections from
‘somefile.o’ the example could be modified to:
     *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
all sections.  Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
     EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)

   You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
file.  You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
data that needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
     data.o(.data)

   To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.

   Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF
sections:

     SECTIONS {
       .text : { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) }
       .text2 :  { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) }
     }

   In this example, the output section ‘.text’ will be comprised of any
input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
‘SHF_MERGE’ and ‘SHF_STRINGS’ are set.  The output section ‘.text2’ will
be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text) whose
section header flag ‘SHF_WRITE’ is clear.

   You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with
no whitespace around the colon.

‘archive:file’
     matches file within archive
‘archive:’
     matches the whole archive
‘:file’
     matches file but not one in an archive

   Either one or both of ‘archive’ and ‘file’ can contain shell
wildcards.  On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so ‘c:myfile.o’
is a simple file specification, not ‘myfile.o’ within an archive called
‘c’.  ‘archive:file’ filespecs may also be used within an ‘EXCLUDE_FILE’
list, but may not appear in other linker script contexts.  For instance,
you cannot extract a file from an archive by using ‘archive:file’ in an
‘INPUT’ command.

   If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
in the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
     data.o

   When you use a file name which is not an ‘archive:file’ specifier and
does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first see if
you also specified the file name on the linker command line or in an
‘INPUT’ command.  If you did not, the linker will attempt to open the
file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line.  Note
that this differs from an ‘INPUT’ command, because the linker will not
search for the file in the archive search path.


File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Wildcards,  Next: Input Section Common,  Prev: Input Section Basics,  Up: Input Section

3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
.......................................

In an input section description, either the file name or the section
name or both may be wildcard patterns.

   The file name of ‘*’ seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
pattern for the file name.

   The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.

‘*’
     matches any number of characters
‘?’
     matches any single character
‘[CHARS]’
     matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the ‘-’ character
     may be used to specify a range of characters, as in ‘[a-z]’ to
     match any lower case letter
‘\’
     quotes the following character

   File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
specified on the command line or in an ‘INPUT’ command.  The linker does
not search directories to expand wildcards.

   If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
linker will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
‘data.o’ rule will not be used:
     .data : { *(.data) }
     .data1 : { data.o(.data) }

   Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can
change this by using the ‘SORT_BY_NAME’ keyword, which appears before a
wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., ‘SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)’).  When
the ‘SORT_BY_NAME’ keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
file.

   ‘SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT’ is similar to ‘SORT_BY_NAME’.
‘SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT’ will sort sections into descending order of
alignment before placing them in the output file.  Placing larger
alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
needed.

   ‘SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY’ is also similar to ‘SORT_BY_NAME’.
‘SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY’ will sort sections into ascending numerical
order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the section name
before placing them in the output file.  In ‘.init_array.NNNNN’ and
‘.fini_array.NNNNN’, ‘NNNNN’ is the init_priority.  In ‘.ctors.NNNNN’
and ‘.dtors.NNNNN’, ‘NNNNN’ is 65535 minus the init_priority.

   ‘SORT’ is an alias for ‘SORT_BY_NAME’.

   ‘REVERSE’ indicates that the sorting should be reversed.  If used on
its own then ‘REVERSE’ implies ‘SORT_BY_NAME’, otherwise it reverses the
enclosed ‘SORT..’ command.  Note - reverse sorting of alignment is not
currently supported.

   Note - the sorting commands only accept a single wildcard pattern.
So for example the following will not work:
       *(REVERSE(.text* .init*))
   To resolve this problem list the patterns individually, like this:
       *(REVERSE(.text*))
       *(REVERSE(.init*))

   Note - you can put the ‘EXCLUDE_FILE’ command inside a sorting
command, but not the other way around.  So for example:
       *(SORT_BY_NAME(EXCLUDE_FILE(foo) .text*))
   will work, but:
       *(EXCLUDE_FILE(foo) SORT_BY_NAME(.text*))
   will not.

   When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.

  1. ‘SORT_BY_NAME’ (‘SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT’ (wildcard section pattern)).
     It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if
     two sections have the same name.
  2. ‘SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT’ (‘SORT_BY_NAME’ (wildcard section pattern)).
     It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if
     two sections have the same alignment.
  3. ‘SORT_BY_NAME’ (‘SORT_BY_NAME’ (wildcard section pattern)) is
     treated the same as ‘SORT_BY_NAME’ (wildcard section pattern).
  4. ‘SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT’ (‘SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT’ (wildcard section
     pattern)) is treated the same as ‘SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT’ (wildcard
     section pattern).
  5. ‘SORT_BY_NAME’ (‘REVERSE’ (wildcard section pattern)) reverse sorts
     by name.
  6. ‘REVERSE’ (‘SORT_BY_NAME’ (wildcard section pattern)) reverse sorts
     by name.
  7. ‘SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY’ (‘REVERSE’ (wildcard section pattern))
     reverse sorts by init priority.
  8. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.

   When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
precedence over the command-line option.

   If the section sorting command in linker script isn’t nested, the
command-line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
as nested sorting command.

  1. ‘SORT_BY_NAME’ (wildcard section pattern ) with ‘--sort-sections
     alignment’ is equivalent to ‘SORT_BY_NAME’ (‘SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT’
     (wildcard section pattern)).
  2. ‘SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT’ (wildcard section pattern) with ‘--sort-section
     name’ is equivalent to ‘SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT’ (‘SORT_BY_NAME’
     (wildcard section pattern)).

   If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
command-line option will be ignored.

   ‘SORT_NONE’ disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
section sorting option.

   If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
the ‘-M’ linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.

   This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all ‘.text’
sections in ‘.text’ and all ‘.bss’ sections in ‘.bss’.  The linker will
place the ‘.data’ section from all files beginning with an upper case
character in ‘.DATA’; for all other files, the linker will place the
‘.data’ section in ‘.data’.
     SECTIONS {
       .text : { *(.text) }
       .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
       .data : { *(.data) }
       .bss : { *(.bss) }
     }


File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Common,  Next: Input Section Keep,  Prev: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section

3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
........................................

A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
named ‘COMMON’.

   You may use file names with the ‘COMMON’ section just as with any
other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
input files are placed in another section.

   In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
‘.bss’ section in the output file.  For example:
     .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }

   Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
common symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will
use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses ‘COMMON’ for standard common
symbols and ‘.scommon’ for small common symbols.  This permits you to
map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
locations.

   You will sometimes see ‘[COMMON]’ in old linker scripts.  This
notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to ‘*(COMMON)’.


File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Keep,  Next: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Common,  Up: Input Section

3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
............................................

When link-time garbage collection is in use (‘--gc-sections’), it is
often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.  This is
accomplished by surrounding an input section’s wildcard entry with
‘KEEP()’, as in ‘KEEP(*(.init))’ or ‘KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))’.


File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Keep,  Up: Input Section

3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
.............................

The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
to read all of the sections from file ‘all.o’ and place them at the
start of output section ‘outputa’ which starts at location ‘0x10000’.
All of section ‘.input1’ from file ‘foo.o’ follows immediately, in the
same output section.  All of section ‘.input2’ from ‘foo.o’ goes into
output section ‘outputb’, followed by section ‘.input1’ from ‘foo1.o’.
All of the remaining ‘.input1’ and ‘.input2’ sections from any files are
written to output section ‘outputc’.

     SECTIONS {
       outputa 0x10000 :
         {
         all.o
         foo.o (.input1)
         }
       outputb :
         {
         foo.o (.input2)
         foo1.o (.input1)
         }
       outputc :
         {
         *(.input1)
         *(.input2)
         }
     }

   If an output section’s name is the same as the input section’s name
and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section.  These
indicate the start address and end address of the output section
respectively.  Note: most section names are not representable as C
identifiers because they contain a ‘.’ character.


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Data,  Next: Output Section Keywords,  Prev: Input Section,  Up: SECTIONS

3.6.5 Output Section Data
-------------------------

You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
‘BYTE’, ‘SHORT’, ‘LONG’, ‘QUAD’, or ‘SQUAD’ as an output section
command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
providing the value to store (*note Expressions::).  The value of the
expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.

   The ‘BYTE’, ‘SHORT’, ‘LONG’, and ‘QUAD’ commands store one, two,
four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the bytes, the
location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.

   For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
value of the symbol ‘addr’:
     BYTE(1)
     LONG(addr)

   When using a 64 bit host or target, ‘QUAD’ and ‘SQUAD’ are the same;
they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and target
are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case ‘QUAD’
stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and ‘SQUAD’ stores a 32
bit value sign extended to 64 bits.

   If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
endianness.  When the object file format does not have an explicit
endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
stored in the endianness of the first input object file.

   You can include a zero-terminated string in an output section by
using ‘ASCIZ’.  The keyword is followed by a string which is stored at
the current value of the location counter adding a zero byte at the end.
If the string includes spaces it must be enclosed in double quotes.  The
string may contain ’\n’, ’\r’, ’\t’ and octal numbers.  Hex numbers are
not supported.

   For example, this string of 16 characters will create a 17 byte area
       ASCIZ "This is 16 bytes"

   Note—these commands only work inside a section description and not
between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } } 
   whereas this will work:
     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } } 

   You may use the ‘FILL’ command to set the fill pattern for the
current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary.  A ‘FILL’
statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
the section definition; by including more than one ‘FILL’ statement, you
can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
section.

   This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
value ‘0x90’:
     FILL(0x90909090)

   The ‘FILL’ command is similar to the ‘=FILLEXP’ output section
attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
‘FILL’ command, rather than the entire section.  If both are used, the
‘FILL’ command takes precedence.  *Note Output Section Fill::, for
details on the fill expression.

   Note - normally the value of ‘expression’ is zero extended to 4 bytes
when used to fill gaps.  Thus ‘FILL(144)’ will fill a region with
repeats of the pattern ‘0 0 0 144’.  The value is treated as a
big-endian number, so for example ‘FILL(22 * 256 + 23)’ will fill the
region with repeats of the pattern ‘0 0 22 23’.  If the expression
results in a value with more than 4 significant bytes only the least 4
bytes of the value will be used.

   The above rules do not apply when the ‘expression’ is a simple
hexadecimal number.  In this case zero extension is not performed and
all bytes are significant.  So ‘FILL(0x90)’ will fill a region with
repeats of ‘0x90’ with no zero bytes, and ‘FILL(0x9192)’ will fill the
region with repeats of ‘0x91 0x92’.  Zero bytes in a hexadecimal
expression are significant even at the start, so ‘FILL(0x0090)’ will
fill a region with repeats of ‘0x00 0x90’.

   Hexadecimal numbers can be longer than 4 bytes, and all of the bytes
are significant, so ‘FILL(0x123456789a)’ will fill a region with repeats
of the 5 byte sequence ‘0x12 0x34 0x56 0x78 0x9a’.  Excess bytes in a
hexadecimal value beyond the size of a region will be silently ignored.

   The above only applies to hexadecimal numbers specified as
‘0x[0-9][a-f][A-F]’.  Hexadecimal numbers specified with a ‘$’ prefix,
or a ‘h’, ‘H’, ‘x’ or ‘X’ suffix will follow the normal fill value
rules.  This also applies to expressions that involve hexadecimal
numbers, and hexadecimal numbers that have a magnitude suffix.

   The ‘LINKER_VERSION’ command inserts a string containing the version
of the linker at the current point.  Note - by default this directive is
disabled and will do nothing.  It only becomes active if the
‘--enable-linker-version’ command line option is used.

   Built-in linker scripts for ELF based targets already include this
directive in their ‘.comment’ section.


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Keywords,  Next: Output Section Discarding,  Prev: Output Section Data,  Up: SECTIONS

3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
-----------------------------

There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
commands.

‘CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS’
     The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
     file.  The name of each symbol will be the name of the
     corresponding input file.  The section of each symbol will be the
     output section in which the ‘CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS’ command
     appears.

     This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
     normally used for any other object file format.

‘CONSTRUCTORS’
     When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
     unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
     destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
     arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
     automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
     name.  For these object file formats, the ‘CONSTRUCTORS’ command
     tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
     section where the ‘CONSTRUCTORS’ command appears.  The
     ‘CONSTRUCTORS’ command is ignored for other object file formats.

     The symbol ‘__CTOR_LIST__’ marks the start of the global
     constructors, and the symbol ‘__CTOR_END__’ marks the end.
     Similarly, ‘__DTOR_LIST__’ and ‘__DTOR_END__’ mark the start and
     end of the global destructors.  The first word in the list is the
     number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
     destructor, followed by a zero word.  The compiler must arrange to
     actually run the code.  For these object file formats GNU C++
     normally calls constructors from a subroutine ‘__main’; a call to
     ‘__main’ is automatically inserted into the startup code for
     ‘main’.  GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
     ‘atexit’, or directly from the function ‘exit’.

     For object file formats such as ‘COFF’ or ‘ELF’ which support
     arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
     addresses of global constructors and destructors into the ‘.ctors’
     and ‘.dtors’ sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
     linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
     runtime code expects to see.

                __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
                LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
                *(.ctors)
                LONG(0)
                __CTOR_END__ = .;
                __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
                LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
                *(.dtors)
                LONG(0)
                __DTOR_END__ = .;

     If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
     which provides some control over the order in which global
     constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
     to ensure that they are executed in the correct order.  When using
     the ‘CONSTRUCTORS’ command, use ‘SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)’
     instead.  When using the ‘.ctors’ and ‘.dtors’ sections, use
     ‘*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))’ and ‘*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))’ instead of
     just ‘*(.ctors)’ and ‘*(.dtors)’.

     Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
     automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with them.
     However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++ and
     writing your own linker scripts.


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Discarding,  Next: Output Section Attributes,  Prev: Output Section Keywords,  Up: SECTIONS

3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
-------------------------------

The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may
not be present in any of the input files.  For example:
     .foo : { *(.foo) }
will only create a ‘.foo’ section in the output file if there is a
‘.foo’ section in at least one input file, and if the input sections are
not all empty.  Other link script directives that allocate space in an
output section will also create the output section.  So too will
assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create space, except
for ‘. = 0’, ‘. = . + 0’, ‘. = sym’, ‘. = . + sym’ and ‘. = ALIGN (. !=
0, expr, 1)’ when ‘sym’ is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the
script.  This allows you to force output of an empty section with ‘. =
.’.

   The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
defines symbols in the output section.  In that case the linker will
obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
section is discarded.

   The special output section name ‘/DISCARD/’ may be used to discard
input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
section named ‘/DISCARD/’ are not included in the output file.

   This can be used to discard input sections marked with the ELF flag
‘SHF_GNU_RETAIN’, which would otherwise have been saved from linker
garbage collection.

   Note, sections that match the ‘/DISCARD/’ output section will be
discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
members which are not being discarded.  This is deliberate.  Discarding
takes precedence over grouping.


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Attributes,  Next: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Discarding,  Up: SECTIONS

3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
-------------------------------

We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
like this:

     SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
       [AT(LMA)]
       [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
       [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
       [CONSTRAINT]
       {
         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
         ...
       } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]

   We’ve already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.
In this section we will describe the remaining section attributes.

* Menu:

* Output Section Type::		Output section type
* Output Section LMA::		Output section LMA
* Forced Output Alignment::	Forced Output Alignment
* Forced Input Alignment::	Forced Input Alignment
* Output Section Constraint::   Output section constraint
* Output Section Region::	Output section region
* Output Section Phdr::		Output section phdr
* Output Section Fill::		Output section fill


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Type,  Next: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes

3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
...........................

Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
parentheses.  The following types are defined:

‘NOLOAD’
     The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
     be loaded into memory when the program is run.

‘READONLY’
     The section should be marked as read-only.

‘DSECT’
‘COPY’
‘INFO’
‘OVERLAY’
     These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
     rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
     marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
     section when the program is run.

‘TYPE = TYPE’
     Set the section type to the integer TYPE.  When generating an ELF
     output file, type names ‘SHT_PROGBITS’, ‘SHT_STRTAB’, ‘SHT_NOTE’,
     ‘SHT_NOBITS’, ‘SHT_INIT_ARRAY’, ‘SHT_FINI_ARRAY’, and
     ‘SHT_PREINIT_ARRAY’ are also allowed for TYPE.  It is the user’s
     responsibility to ensure that any special requirements of the
     section type are met.

     Note - the TYPE only is used if some or all of the contents of the
     section do not have an implicit type of their own.  So for example:
            .foo . TYPE = SHT_PROGBITS { *(.bar) }
     will set the type of section ‘.foo’ to the type of the section
     ‘.bar’ in the input files, which may not be the SHT_PROGBITS type.
     Whereas:
            .foo . TYPE = SHT_PROGBITS { BYTE(1) }
     will set the type of ‘.foo’ to SHT_PROGBBITS. If it is necessary to
     override the type of incoming sections and force the output section
     type then an extra piece of untyped data will be needed:
            .foo . TYPE = SHT_PROGBITS { BYTE(1); *(.bar) }

‘READONLY ( TYPE = TYPE )’
     This form of the syntax combines the READONLY type with the type
     specified by TYPE.

   The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the ‘ROM’
section is addressed at memory location ‘0’ and does not need to be
loaded when the program is run.
     SECTIONS {
       ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
       ...
     }


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section LMA,  Next: Forced Output Alignment,  Prev: Output Section Type,  Up: Output Section Attributes

3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
..........................

Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
*note Basic Script Concepts::.  The virtual address is specified by the
*note Output Section Address:: described earlier.  The load address is
specified by the ‘AT’ or ‘AT>’ keywords.  Specifying a load address is
optional.

   The ‘AT’ keyword takes an expression as an argument.  This specifies
the exact load address of the section.  The ‘AT>’ keyword takes the name
of a memory region as an argument.  *Note MEMORY::.  The load address of
the section is set to the next free address in the region, aligned to
the section’s alignment requirements.

   If neither ‘AT’ nor ‘AT>’ is specified for an allocatable section,
the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the load
address:

   • If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as the
     LMA address as well.

   • If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.

   • Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible with
     the current section, and this region contains at least one section,
     then the LMA is set so the difference between the VMA and LMA is
     the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of the last
     section in the located region.

   • If no memory regions have been declared then a default region that
     covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.

   • If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
     section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.

   This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
called ‘.text’, which starts at ‘0x1000’, one called ‘.mdata’, which is
loaded at the end of the ‘.text’ section even though its VMA is
‘0x2000’, and one called ‘.bss’ to hold uninitialized data at address
‘0x3000’.  The symbol ‘_data’ is defined with the value ‘0x2000’, which
shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.

     SECTIONS
       {
       .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
       .mdata 0x2000 :
         AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
         { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  }
       .bss 0x3000 :
         { _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
     }

   The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
with this linker script would include something like the following, to
copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
linker script.

     extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
     char *src = &_etext;
     char *dst = &_data;

     /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it.  */
     while (dst < &_edata)
       *dst++ = *src++;

     /* Zero bss.  */
     for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
       *dst = 0;


File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Output Alignment,  Next: Forced Input Alignment,  Prev: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes

3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
...............................

You can increase an output section’s alignment by using ALIGN. As an
alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA
remains intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT
attribute.


File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Input Alignment,  Next: Output Section Constraint,  Prev: Forced Output Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes

3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
..............................

You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
sections, whether larger or smaller.


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Constraint,  Next: Output Section Region,  Prev: Forced Input Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes

3.6.8.5 Output Section Constraint
.................................

You can specify that an output section should only be created if all of
its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
read-write by using the keyword ‘ONLY_IF_RO’ and ‘ONLY_IF_RW’
respectively.


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Region,  Next: Output Section Phdr,  Prev: Output Section Constraint,  Up: Output Section Attributes

3.6.8.6 Output Section Region
.............................

You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
using ‘>REGION’.  *Note MEMORY::.

   Here is a simple example:
     MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
     SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Phdr,  Next: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Region,  Up: Output Section Attributes

3.6.8.7 Output Section Phdr
...........................

You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
using ‘:PHDR’.  *Note PHDRS::.  If a section is assigned to one or more
segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly ‘:PHDR’ modifier.
You can use ‘:NONE’ to tell the linker to not put the section in any
segment at all.

   Here is a simple example:
     PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }


File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Phdr,  Up: Output Section Attributes

3.6.8.8 Output Section Fill
...........................

You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using ‘=FILLEXP’.
FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::).  Any otherwise
unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
filled with the value, repeated as necessary.  If the fill expression is
a simple hex number, ie.  a string of hex digit starting with ‘0x’ and
without a trailing ‘k’ or ‘M’, then an arbitrarily long sequence of hex
digits can be used to specify the fill pattern; Leading zeros become
part of the pattern too.  For all other cases, including extra
parentheses or a unary ‘+’, the fill pattern is the four least
significant bytes of the value of the expression.  If the value is less
than four bytes in size then it will be zero extended to four bytes.  In
all cases, the number is big-endian.

     Fill Value     Fill Pattern
     0x90           90 90 90 90
     0x0090         00 90 00 90
     144            00 00 00 90

   You can also change the fill value with a ‘FILL’ command in the
output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).

   Here is a simple example:
     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }


File: ld.info,  Node: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Attributes,  Up: SECTIONS

3.6.9 Overlay Description
-------------------------

An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
than another.

   Overlays are described using the ‘OVERLAY’ command.  The ‘OVERLAY’
command is used within a ‘SECTIONS’ command, like an output section
description.  The full syntax of the ‘OVERLAY’ command is as follows:
     OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
       {
         SECNAME1
           {
             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
             ...
           } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
         SECNAME2
           {
             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
             ...
           } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
         ...
       } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL] [,]

   Everything is optional except ‘OVERLAY’ (a keyword), and each section
must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above).  The section definitions
within the ‘OVERLAY’ construct are identical to those within the general
‘SECTIONS’ construct (*note SECTIONS::), except that no addresses and no
memory regions may be defined for sections within an ‘OVERLAY’.

   The comma at the end may be required if a FILL is used and the next
SECTIONS-COMMAND looks like a continuation of the expression.

   The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The
load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
‘OVERLAY’ as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
location counter).

   If the ‘NOCROSSREFS’ keyword is used, and there are any references
among the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections
all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
section to refer directly to another.  *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
Commands.

   For each section within the ‘OVERLAY’, the linker automatically
provides two symbols.  The symbol ‘__load_start_SECNAME’ is defined as
the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
‘__load_stop_SECNAME’ is defined as the final load address of the
section.  Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these symbols to
move the overlaid sections around as necessary.

   At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
section.

   Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
‘SECTIONS’ construct.
       OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
        {
          .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
          .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
        }
This will define both ‘.text0’ and ‘.text1’ to start at address 0x1000.
‘.text0’ will be loaded at address 0x4000, and ‘.text1’ will be loaded
immediately after ‘.text0’.  The following symbols will be defined if
referenced: ‘__load_start_text0’, ‘__load_stop_text0’,
‘__load_start_text1’, ‘__load_stop_text1’.

   C code to copy overlay ‘.text1’ into the overlay area might look like
the following.

       extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
       memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
               &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);

   Note that the ‘OVERLAY’ command is just syntactic sugar, since
everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
example could have been written identically as follows.

       .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
       PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
       PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
       .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
       PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
       PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
       . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));


File: ld.info,  Node: MEMORY,  Next: PHDRS,  Prev: SECTIONS,  Up: Scripts

3.7 MEMORY Command
==================

The linker’s default configuration permits allocation of all available
memory.  You can override this by using the ‘MEMORY’ command.

   The ‘MEMORY’ command describes the location and size of blocks of
memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
around to fit into the available regions.

   A linker script may contain many uses of the ‘MEMORY’ command,
however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were specified
inside a single ‘MEMORY’ command.  The syntax for ‘MEMORY’ is:
     MEMORY
       {
         NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
         ...
       }

   The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.  Region
names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region must
have a distinct name within the ‘MEMORY’ command.  However you can add
later alias names to existing memory regions with the *note
REGION_ALIAS:: command.

   The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in *note
SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.

   The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
‘R’
     Read-only section
‘W’
     Read/write section
‘X’
     Executable section
‘A’
     Allocatable section
‘I’
     Initialized section
‘L’
     Same as ‘I’
‘!’
     Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow

   If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other
than ‘!’, it will be placed in the memory region.  The ‘!’ attribute
reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an unmapped
section will be placed in the memory region only if it does not match
any of the attributes listed afterwards.  Thus an attribute string of
‘RW!X’ will match any unmapped section that has either or both of the
‘R’ and ‘W’ attributes, but only as long as the section does not also
have the ‘X’ attribute.

   The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it cannot
involve any symbols.  The keyword ‘ORIGIN’ may be abbreviated to ‘org’
or ‘o’ (but not, for example, ‘ORG’).

   The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only and
must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword ‘LENGTH’ may be abbreviated to
‘len’ or ‘l’.

   In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
regions available for allocation: one starting at ‘0’ for 256 kilobytes,
and the other starting at ‘0x40000000’ for four megabytes.  The linker
will place into the ‘rom’ memory region every section which is not
explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
explicitly mapped into a memory region into the ‘ram’ memory region.

     MEMORY
       {
         rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
         ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
       }

   Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
specific output sections into that memory region by using the ‘>REGION’
output section attribute.  For example, if you have a memory region
named ‘mem’, you would use ‘>mem’ in the output section definition.
*Note Output Section Region::.  If no address was specified for the
output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
address within the memory region.  If the combined output sections
directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
will issue an error message.

   It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
expression via the ‘ORIGIN(MEMORY)’ and ‘LENGTH(MEMORY)’ functions:

       _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;


File: ld.info,  Node: PHDRS,  Next: VERSION,  Prev: MEMORY,  Up: Scripts

3.8 PHDRS Command
=================

The ELF object file format uses “program headers”, also knows as
“segments”.  The program headers describe how the program should be
loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the ‘objdump’
program with the ‘-p’ option.

   When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.

   The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
precisely.  You may use the ‘PHDRS’ command for this purpose.  When the
linker sees the ‘PHDRS’ command in the linker script, it will not create
any program headers other than the ones specified.

   The linker only pays attention to the ‘PHDRS’ command when generating
an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply ignore
‘PHDRS’.

   This is the syntax of the ‘PHDRS’ command.  The words ‘PHDRS’,
‘FILEHDR’, ‘AT’, and ‘FLAGS’ are keywords.

     PHDRS
     {
       NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
             [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
     }

   The NAME is used only for reference in the ‘SECTIONS’ command of the
linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program header
names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header must
have a distinct name.  The headers are processed in order and it is
usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.

   Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
sections in the segments.  You use the ‘:PHDR’ output section attribute
to place a section in a particular segment.  *Note Output Section
Phdr::.

   It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
repeat ‘:PHDR’, using it once for each segment which should contain the
section.

   If you place a section in one or more segments using ‘:PHDR’, then
the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
specify ‘:PHDR’ in the same segments.  This is for convenience, since
generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
segment.  You can use ‘:NONE’ to override the default segment and tell
the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.

   You may use the ‘FILEHDR’ and ‘PHDRS’ keywords after the program
header type to further describe the contents of the segment.  The
‘FILEHDR’ keyword means that the segment should include the ELF file
header.  The ‘PHDRS’ keyword means that the segment should include the
ELF program headers themselves.  If applied to a loadable segment
(‘PT_LOAD’), all prior loadable segments must have one of these
keywords.

   The TYPE may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the value
of the keyword.

‘PT_NULL’ (0)
     Indicates an unused program header.

‘PT_LOAD’ (1)
     Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded
     from the file.

‘PT_DYNAMIC’ (2)
     Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.

‘PT_INTERP’ (3)
     Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
     be found.

‘PT_NOTE’ (4)
     Indicates a segment holding note information.

‘PT_SHLIB’ (5)
     A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
     ELF ABI.

‘PT_PHDR’ (6)
     Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.

‘PT_TLS’ (7)
     Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.

EXPRESSION
     An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This
     may be used for types not defined above.

   You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
address in memory by using an ‘AT’ expression.  This is identical to the
‘AT’ command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
LMA::).  The ‘AT’ command for a program header overrides the output
section attribute.

   The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
which comprise the segment.  You may use the ‘FLAGS’ keyword to
explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of FLAGS must be an
integer.  It is used to set the ‘p_flags’ field of the program header.

   Here is an example of ‘PHDRS’.  This shows a typical set of program
headers used on a native ELF system.

     PHDRS
     {
       headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
       interp PT_INTERP ;
       text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
       data PT_LOAD ;
       dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
     }

     SECTIONS
     {
       . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
       .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
       .text : { *(.text) } :text
       .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
       ...
       . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
       .data : { *(.data) } :data
       .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
       ...
     }


File: ld.info,  Node: VERSION,  Next: Expressions,  Prev: PHDRS,  Up: Scripts

3.9 VERSION Command
===================

The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
shared library.

   You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You
can also use the ‘--version-script’ linker option.

   The syntax of the ‘VERSION’ command is simply
     VERSION { version-script-commands }

   The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
by Sun’s linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
library.

   The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
few examples.

     VERS_1.1 {
     	 global:
     		 foo1;
     	 local:
     		 old*;
     		 original*;
     		 new*;
     };

     VERS_1.2 {
     		 foo2;
     } VERS_1.1;

     VERS_2.0 {
     		 bar1; bar2;
     	 extern "C++" {
     		 ns::*;
     		 "f(int, double)";
     	 };
     } VERS_1.2;

   This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
version node defined is ‘VERS_1.1’; it has no other dependencies.  The
script binds the symbol ‘foo1’ to ‘VERS_1.1’.  It reduces a number of
symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any symbol
whose name begins with ‘old’, ‘original’, or ‘new’ is matched.  The
wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell when
matching filenames (also known as “globbing”).  However, if you specify
the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated as
literal, rather than as a glob pattern.

   Next, the version script defines node ‘VERS_1.2’.  This node depends
upon ‘VERS_1.1’.  The script binds the symbol ‘foo2’ to the version node
‘VERS_1.2’.

   Finally, the version script defines node ‘VERS_2.0’.  This node
depends upon ‘VERS_1.2’.  The scripts binds the symbols ‘bar1’ and
‘bar2’ are bound to the version node ‘VERS_2.0’.

   When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
unspecified symbols to a given version node by using ‘global: *;’
somewhere in the version script.  Note that it’s slightly crazy to use
wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node.  Global
wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
set exported for an old version.  That’s wrong since older versions
ought to have a fixed set of symbols.

   The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
what they might suggest to the person reading them.  The ‘2.0’ version
could just as well have appeared in between ‘1.1’ and ‘1.2’.  However,
this would be a confusing way to write a version script.

   Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in the
version script.  Such version script doesn’t assign any versions to
symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
which won’t.

     { global: foo; bar; local: *; };

   When you link an application against a shared library that has
versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
each shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
search for each symbol reference.

   The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
the libraries being used with the application are too old.

   There are several GNU extensions to Sun’s versioning approach.  The
first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
     __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
in the C source file.  This renames the function ‘original_foo’ to be an
alias for ‘foo’ bound to the version node ‘VERS_1.1’.  The ‘local:’
directive can be used to prevent the symbol ‘original_foo’ from being
exported.  A ‘.symver’ directive takes precedence over a version script.

   The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
linked against the old interface to continue to function.

   To do this, you must use multiple ‘.symver’ directives in the source
file.  Here is an example:

     __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
     __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
     __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@VERS_1.2");
     __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");

   In this example, ‘foo@’ represents the symbol ‘foo’ bound to the
unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains
this example would define 4 C functions: ‘original_foo’, ‘old_foo’,
‘old_foo1’, and ‘new_foo’.

   When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the ‘foo@@VERS_2.0’
type of ‘.symver’ directive.  You can only declare one version of a
symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
have multiple definitions of the same symbol.

   If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience (i.e.,
‘old_foo’), or you can use the ‘.symver’ directive to specifically bind
to an external version of the function in question.

   You can also specify the language in the version script:

     VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }

   The supported ‘lang’s are ‘C’, ‘C++’, and ‘Java’.  The linker will
iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
according to ‘lang’ before matching them to the patterns specified in
‘version-script-commands’.  The default ‘lang’ is ‘C’.

   Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names, or
you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In the
latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler might
change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
when you upgrade.


File: ld.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: VERSION,  Up: Scripts

3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
==================================

The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
that of C expressions, except that whitespace is required in some places
to resolve syntactic ambiguities.  All expressions are evaluated as
integers.  All expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32
bits if both the host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.

   You can use and set symbol values in expressions.

   The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
in expressions.

* Menu:

* Constants::			Constants
* Symbolic Constants::          Symbolic constants
* Symbols::			Symbol Names
* Orphan Sections::		Orphan Sections
* Location Counter::		The Location Counter
* Operators::			Operators
* Evaluation::			Evaluation
* Expression Section::		The Section of an Expression
* Builtin Functions::		Builtin Functions


File: ld.info,  Node: Constants,  Next: Symbolic Constants,  Up: Expressions

3.10.1 Constants
----------------

All constants are integers.

   As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with ‘0’ to be
octal, and an integer beginning with ‘0x’ or ‘0X’ to be hexadecimal.
Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of ‘h’ or ‘H’ for hexadecimal,
‘o’ or ‘O’ for octal, ‘b’ or ‘B’ for binary and ‘d’ or ‘D’ for decimal.
Any integer value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be
decimal.

   In addition, you can use the suffixes ‘K’ and ‘M’ to scale a constant
by ‘1024’ or ‘1024*1024’ respectively.  For example, the following all
refer to the same quantity:

     _fourk_1 = 4K;
     _fourk_2 = 4096;
     _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
     _fourk_4 = 10000o;

   Note - the ‘K’ and ‘M’ suffixes cannot be used in conjunction with
the base suffixes mentioned above.


File: ld.info,  Node: Symbolic Constants,  Next: Symbols,  Prev: Constants,  Up: Expressions

3.10.2 Symbolic Constants
-------------------------

It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of the
‘CONSTANT(NAME)’ operator, where NAME is one of:

‘MAXPAGESIZE’
     The target’s maximum page size.

‘COMMONPAGESIZE’
     The target’s default page size.

   So for example:

       .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : { *(.text) }

   will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
supported by the target.


File: ld.info,  Node: Symbols,  Next: Orphan Sections,  Prev: Symbolic Constants,  Up: Expressions

3.10.3 Symbol Names
-------------------

Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
     "SECTION" = 9;
     "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;

   Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
safest to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, ‘A-B’ is one
symbol, whereas ‘A - B’ is an expression involving subtraction.


File: ld.info,  Node: Orphan Sections,  Next: Location Counter,  Prev: Symbols,  Up: Expressions

3.10.4 Orphan Sections
----------------------

Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script.  The linker
will still copy these sections into the output file by either finding,
or creating a suitable output section in which to place the orphaned
input section.

   If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
placed at the end of that output section.

   If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
sections will be created.  Each new output section will have the same
name as the orphan section placed within it.  If there are multiple
orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into one
new output section.

   If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections in
relation to existing output sections.  On most modern targets, the
linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.  If no
sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.

   The command-line options ‘--orphan-handling’ and ‘--unique’ (*note
Command-line Options: Options.) can be used to control which output
sections an orphan is placed in.


File: ld.info,  Node: Location Counter,  Next: Operators,  Prev: Orphan Sections,  Up: Expressions

3.10.5 The Location Counter
---------------------------

The special linker variable “dot” ‘.’ always contains the current output
location counter.  Since the ‘.’ always refers to a location in an
output section, it may only appear in an expression within a ‘SECTIONS’
command.  The ‘.’ symbol may appear anywhere that an ordinary symbol is
allowed in an expression.

   Assigning a value to ‘.’ will cause the location counter to be moved.
This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The location
counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section, and may not
be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing creates
areas with overlapping LMAs.

     SECTIONS
     {
       output :
         {
           file1(.text)
           . = . + 1000;
           file2(.text)
           . += 1000;
           file3(.text)
         } = 0x12345678;
     }
In the previous example, the ‘.text’ section from ‘file1’ is located at
the beginning of the output section ‘output’.  It is followed by a 1000
byte gap.  Then the ‘.text’ section from ‘file2’ appears, also with a
1000 byte gap following before the ‘.text’ section from ‘file3’.  The
notation ‘= 0x12345678’ specifies what data to write in the gaps (*note
Output Section Fill::).

   Note: ‘.’ actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
current containing object.  Normally this is the ‘SECTIONS’ statement,
whose start address is 0, hence ‘.’ can be used as an absolute address.
If ‘.’ is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
Thus in a script like this:

     SECTIONS
     {
         . = 0x100
         .text: {
           *(.text)
           . = 0x200
         }
         . = 0x500
         .data: {
           *(.data)
           . += 0x600
         }
     }

   The ‘.text’ section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
‘.text’ input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too much data,
an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move ‘.’
backwards).  The ‘.data’ section will start at 0x500 and it will have an
extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from the
‘.data’ input sections and before the end of the ‘.data’ output section
itself.

   Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:

     SECTIONS
     {
         start_of_text = . ;
         .text: { *(.text) }
         end_of_text = . ;

         start_of_data = . ;
         .data: { *(.data) }
         end_of_data = . ;
     }

   If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g.  ‘.rodata’, not
mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
‘.text’ and ‘.data’.  You might think the linker should place ‘.rodata’
on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
particular significance to the linker.  As well, the linker doesn’t
associate the above symbol names with their sections.  Instead, it
assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
output section, except for the special case of an assignment to ‘.’.
I.e., the linker will place the orphan ‘.rodata’ section as if the
script was written as follows:

     SECTIONS
     {
         start_of_text = . ;
         .text: { *(.text) }
         end_of_text = . ;

         start_of_data = . ;
         .rodata: { *(.rodata) }
         .data: { *(.data) }
         end_of_data = . ;
     }

   This may or may not be the script author’s intention for the value of
‘start_of_data’.  One way to influence the orphan section placement is
to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
assignment to ‘.’ is setting the start address of a following output
section and thus should be grouped with that section.  So you could
write:

     SECTIONS
     {
         start_of_text = . ;
         .text: { *(.text) }
         end_of_text = . ;

         . = . ;
         start_of_data = . ;
         .data: { *(.data) }
         end_of_data = . ;
     }

   Now, the orphan ‘.rodata’ section will be placed between
‘end_of_text’ and ‘start_of_data’.


File: ld.info,  Node: Operators,  Next: Evaluation,  Prev: Location Counter,  Up: Expressions

3.10.6 Operators
----------------

The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
the standard bindings and precedence levels:
     precedence      associativity   Operators                           Notes
     (highest)
     1               left            !  -  ~                             (1)
     2               left            *  /  %
     3               left            +  -
     4               left            >>  <<
     5               left            >  <  <=  >=
     6               left            ==  !=
     7               left            &
     8               left            ^
     9               left            |
     10              left            &&
     11              left            ||
     12              right           ? :
     13              right           +=  -=  *=  /=  <<=  >>=  &=  |= ^= (2)
     (lowest)
   Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.


File: ld.info,  Node: Evaluation,  Next: Expression Section,  Prev: Operators,  Up: Expressions

3.10.7 Evaluation
-----------------

The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
an expression when absolutely necessary.

   The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.

   However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
for use in the symbol assignment expression.

   The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
allocation.

   Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
‘.’, must be evaluated during section allocation.

   If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
following
     SECTIONS
       {
         .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
           { *(.text) }
       }
will cause the error message ‘non constant expression for initial
address’.


File: ld.info,  Node: Expression Section,  Next: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Evaluation,  Up: Expressions

3.10.8 The Section of an Expression
-----------------------------------

Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute.  A section
relative symbol is relocatable.  If you request relocatable output using
the ‘-r’ option, a further link operation may change the value of a
section relative symbol.  On the other hand, an absolute symbol will
retain the same value throughout any further link operations.

   Some terms in linker expressions are addresses.  This is true of
section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
address, such as ‘ADDR’, ‘LOADADDR’, ‘ORIGIN’ and ‘SEGMENT_START’.
Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin functions that return a
non-address value, such as ‘LENGTH’.  One complication is that unless
you set ‘LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")’ (*note Miscellaneous Commands::),
numbers and absolute symbols are treated differently depending on their
location, for compatibility with older versions of ‘ld’.  Expressions
appearing outside an output section definition treat all numbers as
absolute addresses.  Expressions appearing inside an output section
definition treat absolute symbols as numbers.  If ‘LD_FEATURE
("SANE_EXPR")’ is given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply
treated as numbers everywhere.

   In the following simple example,

     SECTIONS
       {
         . = 0x100;
         __executable_start = 0x100;
         .data :
         {
           . = 0x10;
           __data_start = 0x10;
           *(.data)
         }
         ...
       }

   both ‘.’ and ‘__executable_start’ are set to the absolute address
0x100 in the first two assignments, then both ‘.’ and ‘__data_start’ are
set to 0x10 relative to the ‘.data’ section in the second two
assignments.

   For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:

   • Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
     operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
     absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
   • Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on
     two relative addresses in the same section or between one relative
     address and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the
     address(es).
   • Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses
     not in the same section, or between a relative address and an
     absolute address, first convert any non-absolute term to an
     absolute address before applying the operator.

   The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:

   • An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
   • The result of comparisons, ‘&&’ and ‘||’ is also a number.
   • The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
     relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
     (after above conversions) is also a number when ‘LD_FEATURE
     ("SANE_EXPR")’ or inside an output section definition but an
     absolute address otherwise.
   • The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
     relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
     section as the relative operand(s).
   • The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
     conversions) is an absolute address.

   You can use the builtin function ‘ABSOLUTE’ to force an expression to
be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to create
an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output section
‘.data’:
     SECTIONS
       {
         .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
       }
If ‘ABSOLUTE’ were not used, ‘_edata’ would be relative to the ‘.data’
section.

   Using ‘LOADADDR’ also forces an expression absolute, since this
particular builtin function returns an absolute address.


File: ld.info,  Node: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Expression Section,  Up: Expressions

3.10.9 Builtin Functions
------------------------

The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
use in linker script expressions.

‘ABSOLUTE(EXP)’
     Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
     value of the expression EXP.  Primarily useful to assign an
     absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
     symbol values are normally section relative.  *Note Expression
     Section::.

‘ADDR(SECTION)’
     Return the address (VMA) of the named SECTION.  Your script must
     previously have defined the location of that section.  In the
     following example, ‘start_of_output_1’, ‘symbol_1’ and ‘symbol_2’
     are assigned equivalent values, except that ‘symbol_1’ will be
     relative to the ‘.output1’ section while the other two will be
     absolute:
          SECTIONS { ...
            .output1 :
              {
              start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
              ...
              }
            .output :
              {
              symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
              symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
              }
          ... }

‘ALIGN(ALIGN)’
‘ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)’
     Return the location counter (‘.’) or arbitrary expression aligned
     to the next ALIGN boundary.  The single operand ‘ALIGN’ doesn’t
     change the value of the location counter—it just does arithmetic on
     it.  The two operand ‘ALIGN’ allows an arbitrary expression to be
     aligned upwards (‘ALIGN(ALIGN)’ is equivalent to
     ‘ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), ALIGN)’).

     Here is an example which aligns the output ‘.data’ section to the
     next ‘0x2000’ byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
     variable within the section to the next ‘0x8000’ boundary after the
     input sections:
          SECTIONS { ...
            .data ALIGN(0x2000): {
              *(.data)
              variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
            }
          ... }
     The first use of ‘ALIGN’ in this example specifies the location of
     a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS attribute of a
     section definition (*note Output Section Address::).  The second
     use of ‘ALIGN’ is used to defines the value of a symbol.

     The builtin function ‘NEXT’ is closely related to ‘ALIGN’.

‘ALIGNOF(SECTION)’
     Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section
     has been allocated, or zero if the section has not been allocated.
     If the section does not exist in the linker script the linker will
     report an error.  If SECTION is ‘NEXT_SECTION’ then ‘ALIGNOF’ will
     return the alignment of the next allocated section specified in the
     linker script, or zero if there is no such section.  In the
     following example, the alignment of the ‘.output’ section is stored
     as the first value in that section.
          SECTIONS{ ...
            .output {
              LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
              ...
              }
          ... }

‘BLOCK(EXP)’
     This is a synonym for ‘ALIGN’, for compatibility with older linker
     scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an
     output section.

‘DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)’
     This is equivalent to either
          (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
     or
          (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE)
           + ((. + COMMONPAGESIZE - 1) & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
     depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
     pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
     expression and ‘DATA_SEGMENT_END’) than the former or not.  If the
     latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
     memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
     bytes in the on-disk file.

     This expression can only be used directly in ‘SECTIONS’ commands,
     not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
     script.  COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
     should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for
     while still running on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE.  Note
     however that ‘-z relro’ protection will not be effective if the
     system page size is larger than COMMONPAGESIZE.

     Example:
            . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);

‘DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)’
     This defines the end of data segment for ‘DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN’
     evaluation purposes.

            . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);

‘DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)’
     This defines the end of the ‘PT_GNU_RELRO’ segment when ‘-z relro’
     option is used.  When ‘-z relro’ option is not present,
     ‘DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END’ does nothing, otherwise
     ‘DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN’ is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is aligned to
     the COMMONPAGESIZE argument given to ‘DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN’.  If
     present in the linker script, it must be placed between
     ‘DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN’ and ‘DATA_SEGMENT_END’.  Evaluates to the
     second argument plus any padding needed at the end of the
     ‘PT_GNU_RELRO’ segment due to section alignment.

            . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);

‘DEFINED(SYMBOL)’
     Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
     defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
     return 0.  You can use this function to provide default values for
     symbols.  For example, the following script fragment shows how to
     set a global symbol ‘begin’ to the first location in the ‘.text’
     section—but if a symbol called ‘begin’ already existed, its value
     is preserved:

          SECTIONS { ...
            .text : {
              begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
              ...
            }
            ...
          }

‘LENGTH(MEMORY)’
     Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.

‘LOADADDR(SECTION)’
     Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION.  (*note Output
     Section LMA::).

‘LOG2CEIL(EXP)’
     Return the binary logarithm of EXP rounded towards infinity.
     ‘LOG2CEIL(0)’ returns 0.

‘MAX(EXP1, EXP2)’
     Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.

‘MIN(EXP1, EXP2)’
     Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.

‘NEXT(EXP)’
     Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
     This function is closely related to ‘ALIGN(EXP)’; unless you use
     the ‘MEMORY’ command to define discontinuous memory for the output
     file, the two functions are equivalent.

‘ORIGIN(MEMORY)’
     Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.

‘SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)’
     Return the base address of the named SEGMENT.  If an explicit value
     has already been given for this segment (with a command-line ‘-T’
     option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value will
     be DEFAULT.  At present, the ‘-T’ command-line option can only be
     used to set the base address for the “text”, “data”, and “bss”
     sections, but you can use ‘SEGMENT_START’ with any segment name.

‘SIZEOF(SECTION)’
     Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
     been allocated, or zero if the section has not been allocated.  If
     the section does not exist in the linker script the linker will
     report an error.  If SECTION is ‘NEXT_SECTION’ then ‘SIZEOF’ will
     return the alignment of the next allocated section specified in the
     linker script, or zero if there is no such section.  In the
     following example, ‘symbol_1’ and ‘symbol_2’ are assigned identical
     values:
          SECTIONS{ ...
            .output {
              .start = . ;
              ...
              .end = . ;
              }
            symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
            symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
          ... }

‘SIZEOF_HEADERS’
     Return the size in bytes of the output file’s headers.  This is
     information which appears at the start of the output file.  You can
     use this number when setting the start address of the first
     section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.

     When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
     ‘SIZEOF_HEADERS’ builtin function, the linker must compute the
     number of program headers before it has determined all the section
     addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
     additional program headers, it will report an error ‘not enough
     room for program headers’.  To avoid this error, you must avoid
     using the ‘SIZEOF_HEADERS’ function, or you must rework your linker
     script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
     headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
     ‘PHDRS’ command (*note PHDRS::).


File: ld.info,  Node: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Scripts

3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
============================

If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
linker will report an error.

   An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.

   Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
assignments, or the ‘INPUT’, ‘GROUP’, or ‘VERSION’ commands.

   Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
script was read.  This can affect archive searching.


File: ld.info,  Node: Plugins,  Next: Special Sections,  Prev: Scripts,  Up: Top

4 Linker Plugins
****************

The linker can use dynamically loaded plugins to modify its behavior.
For example, the link-time optimization feature that some compilers
support is implemented with a linker plugin.

   Currently there is only one plugin shipped by default, but more may
be added here later.

   Plugins are enabled via the use of the ‘-plugin NAME’ command line
option.  *Note Options::.

* Menu:

* libdep Plugin::	Static Library Dependencies Plugin


File: ld.info,  Node: libdep Plugin,  Up: Plugins

4.1 Static Library Dependencies Plugin
======================================

Originally, static libraries were contained in an archive file
consisting just of a collection of relocatable object files.  Later they
evolved to optionally include a symbol table, to assist in finding the
needed objects within a library.  There their evolution ended, and
dynamic libraries rose to ascendance.

   One useful feature of dynamic libraries was that, more than just
collecting multiple objects into a single file, they also included a
list of their dependencies, such that one could specify just the name of
a single dynamic library at link time, and all of its dependencies would
be implicitly referenced as well.  But static libraries lacked this
feature, so if a link invocation was switched from using dynamic
libraries to static libraries, the link command would usually fail
unless it was rewritten to explicitly list the dependencies of the
static library.

   The GNU ‘ar’ utility now supports a ‘--record-libdeps’ option to
embed dependency lists into static libraries as well, and the ‘libdep’
plugin may be used to read this dependency information at link time.
The dependency information is stored as a single string, carrying ‘-l’
and ‘-L’ arguments as they would normally appear in a linker command
line.  As such, the information can be written with any text utility and
stored into any archive, even if GNU ‘ar’ is not being used to create
the archive.  The information is stored in an archive member named
‘__.LIBDEP’.

   For example, given a library ‘libssl.a’ that depends on another
library ‘libcrypto.a’ which may be found in ‘/usr/local/lib’, the
‘__.LIBDEP’ member of ‘libssl.a’ would contain

     -L/usr/local/lib -lcrypto


File: ld.info,  Node: Special Sections,  Next: Machine Dependent,  Prev: Plugins,  Up: Top

5 Special Sections
******************

When linking ELF format object files ‘ld’ treats some sections in a
special, non standard manner.  This part of the manual describes these
sections.

‘.gnu.warning’
     The contents of any section with this name are assumed to be an
     ascii format warning message.  The contents will be displayed to
     the user if the sections appears in any input file, but the section
     will not be copied into the output image.  If the
     ‘--fatal-warnings’ option is enabled then the warnings - if any are
     encountered - will also stop the link from completing.

     Note - the ‘.gnu.warning’ section is not subject to linker garbage
     collection or orphan handling.

‘.gnu.warning.SYM’
     The contents of any section whoes name starts with the prefix
     ‘.gnu.warning.’ and then finishes with the name of a symbol is
     treated in a similar fashion to the ‘.gnu.warning’ section, but
     only if the named symbol is referenced.  So for example the
     contents of a section called ‘.gnu.warning.foo’ will be displayed
     as warning message if, and only if, the symbol ‘foo’ is referenced
     by one or more of the input files.  This includes object files
     pulled in from static libraries, shared objects needed to complete
     the link and so on.

     Note - because these warning messages are generated before the
     linker performs garbage collection (if enabled) it is possible for
     a warning to be displayed for a symbol that is later removed and
     then never appears in the final output.

‘.note.gnu.property’
     When the linker combines sections of this name it will merge them
     together according to various rules encoded into the notes
     themselves.  Therefore the contents of the output
     .note.gnu.property section may not correspond to a simple
     concatenation of the input sections.  If the ‘-Map’ option has been
     used to request a linker map then details of any property merging
     will be included in the map.


File: ld.info,  Node: Machine Dependent,  Next: BFD,  Prev: Special Sections,  Up: Top

6 Machine Dependent Features
****************************

‘ld’ has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
describe them.  Machines where ‘ld’ has no additional functionality are
not listed.

* Menu:

* H8/300::                      ‘ld’ and the H8/300
* M68HC11/68HC12::		‘ld’ and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
* ARM::				‘ld’ and the ARM family
* HPPA ELF32::                  ‘ld’ and HPPA 32-bit ELF
* M68K::			‘ld’ and the Motorola 68K family
* MIPS::			‘ld’ and the MIPS family
* MMIX::			‘ld’ and MMIX
* MSP430::			‘ld’ and MSP430
* NDS32::			‘ld’ and NDS32
* Nios II::			‘ld’ and the Altera Nios II
* PowerPC ELF32::		‘ld’ and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
* PowerPC64 ELF64::		‘ld’ and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
* S/390 ELF::			‘ld’ and S/390 ELF Support
* SPU ELF::			‘ld’ and SPU ELF Support
* TI COFF::                     ‘ld’ and TI COFF
* WIN32::                       ‘ld’ and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
* Xtensa::                      ‘ld’ and Xtensa Processors


File: ld.info,  Node: H8/300,  Next: M68HC11/68HC12,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.1 ‘ld’ and the H8/300
=======================

For the H8/300, ‘ld’ can perform these global optimizations when you
specify the ‘--relax’ command-line option.

_relaxing address modes_
     ‘ld’ finds all ‘jsr’ and ‘jmp’ instructions whose targets are
     within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
     relative ‘bsr’ and ‘bra’ instructions, respectively.

_synthesizing instructions_
     ‘ld’ finds all ‘mov.b’ instructions which use the sixteen-bit
     absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
     changes them to use the eight-bit address form.  (That is: the
     linker turns ‘mov.b ‘@’AA:16’ into ‘mov.b ‘@’AA:8’ whenever the
     address AA is in the top page of memory).

     ‘ld’ finds all ‘mov’ instructions which use the register indirect
     with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
     displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to
     use the 16-bit displacement form.  (That is: the linker turns
     ‘mov.b ‘@’D:32,ERx’ into ‘mov.b ‘@’D:16,ERx’ whenever the
     displacement D is in the 16 bit signed integer range.  Only
     implemented in ELF-format ld).

_bit manipulation instructions_
     ‘ld’ finds all bit manipulation instructions like ‘band, bclr,
     biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
     bxor’ which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
     to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
     address form.  (That is: the linker turns ‘bset #xx:3,‘@’AA:32’
     into ‘bset #xx:3,‘@’AA:8’ whenever the address AA is in the top
     page of memory).

_system control instructions_
     ‘ld’ finds all ‘ldc.w, stc.w’ instructions which use the 32 bit
     absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
     changes them to use 16 bit address form.  (That is: the linker
     turns ‘ldc.w ‘@’AA:32,ccr’ into ‘ldc.w ‘@’AA:16,ccr’ whenever the
     address AA is in the top page of memory).


File: ld.info,  Node: M68HC11/68HC12,  Next: ARM,  Prev: H8/300,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.2 ‘ld’ and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
====================================================

6.2.1 Linker Relaxation
-----------------------

For the Motorola 68HC11, ‘ld’ can perform these global optimizations
when you specify the ‘--relax’ command-line option.

_relaxing address modes_
     ‘ld’ finds all ‘jsr’ and ‘jmp’ instructions whose targets are
     within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
     relative ‘bsr’ and ‘bra’ instructions, respectively.

     ‘ld’ also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
     transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
     page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).

_relaxing gcc instruction group_
     When ‘gcc’ is called with ‘-mrelax’, it can emit group of
     instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
     addressing mode.  These instructions consists of ‘bclr’ or ‘bset’
     instructions.

6.2.2 Trampoline Generation
---------------------------

For 68HC11 and 68HC12, ‘ld’ can generate trampoline code to call a far
function using a normal ‘jsr’ instruction.  The linker will also change
the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
instead of the function address.  This is typically the case when a
pointer to a function is taken.  The pointer will in fact point to the
function trampoline.


File: ld.info,  Node: ARM,  Next: HPPA ELF32,  Prev: M68HC11/68HC12,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.3 ‘ld’ and the ARM family
===========================

For the ARM, ‘ld’ will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
between ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
been compiled and assembled with the ‘-mthumb-interwork’ command line
option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
option then the ‘--support-old-code’ command-line switch should be given
to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions which
will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however, the
linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
non-interworking aware Thumb code.

   The ‘--thumb-entry’ switch is a duplicate of the generic ‘--entry’
switch, in that it sets the program’s starting address.  But it also
sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
straight away.

   The ‘--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables’ switch is specifying, that the
import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero element
prefix for import libraries.  This is the old style to generate import
tables.  By default this option is turned off.

   The ‘--be8’ switch instructs ‘ld’ to generate BE8 format executables.
This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects - ie ones
which have been assembled with the ‘-EB’ option.  The resulting image
will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.

   The ‘R_ARM_TARGET1’ relocation is typically used for entries in the
‘.init_array’ section.  It is interpreted as either ‘R_ARM_REL32’ or
‘R_ARM_ABS32’, depending on the target.  The ‘--target1-rel’ and
‘--target1-abs’ switches override the default.

   The ‘--target2=type’ switch overrides the default definition of the
‘R_ARM_TARGET2’ relocation.  Valid values for ‘type’, their meanings,
and target defaults are as follows:
‘rel’
     ‘R_ARM_REL32’ (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
‘abs’
     ‘R_ARM_ABS32’
‘got-rel’
     ‘R_ARM_GOT_PREL’ (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)

   The ‘R_ARM_V4BX’ relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
objects.

   In the latter case, the switch ‘--fix-v4bx’ must be passed to the
linker, which causes v4t ‘BX rM’ instructions to be rewritten as ‘MOV
PC,rM’, since v4 processors do not have a ‘BX’ instruction.

   In the former case, the switch should not be used, and ‘R_ARM_V4BX’
relocations are ignored.

   Replace ‘BX rM’ instructions identified by ‘R_ARM_V4BX’ relocations
with a branch to the following veneer:

     TST rM, #1
     MOVEQ PC, rM
     BX Rn

   This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4
cores and are still interworking safe.  Note that the above veneer
clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in
rare cases.

   The ‘--use-blx’ switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
entry.  This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.

   The ‘--vfp11-denorm-fix’ switch enables a link-time workaround for a
bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
before the support code can read the intended values.

   The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use.  The bug
only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
workaround if you are using "runfast" mode.  Please contact ARM for
further details.

   If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this
workaround by specifying the linker option ‘--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar’ if
you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or ‘--vfp-denorm-fix=vector’
if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code).
The default is ‘--vfp-denorm-fix=none’.

   If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each such
sequence which may trigger the erratum.  The veneer consists of the
first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
instruction.  The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
the veneer.  The extra cycles required to call and return from the
veneer are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector
cases.

   The ‘--fix-arm1176’ switch enables a link-time workaround for an
erratum in certain ARM1176 processors.  The workaround is enabled by
default if you are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier.  It
can be disabled unconditionally by specifying ‘--no-fix-arm1176’.

   Further information is available in the “ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
Programmer Advice Notice” available on the ARM documentation website at:
http://infocenter.arm.com/.

   The ‘--fix-stm32l4xx-629360’ switch enables a link-time workaround
for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of the STM32
Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx).  When accessing off-chip memory
via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more, the bus can
generate corrupt data and/or abort.  These are only core-initiated
accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access: integer loads such as
LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM, VPOP. Stores are not
affected.

   The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.

   The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
‘--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none’.  If you know you are using buggy
STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
linker option ‘--fix-stm32l4xx-629360’, or the equivalent
‘--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default’.

   If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each such
sequence which may trigger the erratum.  The veneer consists in a
replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
branch back to the subsequent instruction.  The original instruction is
then replaced with a branch to the veneer.

   The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.

   The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
there.  In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
occurs.

   The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
PC-relative branch instruction if the ‘.text’ section is too large.  In
that case, when the branch that replaces the original code cannot be
encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement occurs.

   The ‘--no-enum-size-warning’ switch prevents the linker from warning
when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
diagnosed.

   The ‘--no-wchar-size-warning’ switch prevents the linker from warning
when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI ‘wchar_t’ size
attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an object
file using 32-bit ‘wchar_t’ values with another using 16-bit ‘wchar_t’
values will not be diagnosed.

   The ‘--pic-veneer’ switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where ‘--emit-relocs’ is
used to generate relocatable binaries.

   The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away.  The placement
of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is controlled by the
command-line option ‘--stub-group-size=N’.  The placement is important
because a poor choice can create a need for duplicate stubs, increasing
the code size.  The linker will try to group stubs together in order to
reduce interruptions to the flow of code, but it needs guidance as to
how big these groups should be and where they should be placed.

   The value of ‘N’, the parameter to the ‘--stub-group-size=’ option
controls where the stub groups are placed.  If it is negative then all
stubs are placed after the first branch that needs them.  If it is
positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the
branches that need them.  If the value of ‘N’ is 1 (either +1 or -1)
then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs,
using its built in heuristics.  A value of ‘N’ greater than 1 (or
smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can
service at most ‘N’ bytes from the input sections.

   The default, if ‘--stub-group-size=’ is not specified, is ‘N = +1’.

   Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
only, because it relies on object files properties not present
otherwise.

   The ‘--fix-cortex-a8’ switch enables a link-time workaround for an
erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors.  The workaround is enabled by
default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile.  It can
be enabled otherwise by specifying ‘--fix-cortex-a8’, or disabled
unconditionally by specifying ‘--no-fix-cortex-a8’.

   The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code.  Please contact ARM for
further details.

   The ‘--fix-cortex-a53-835769’ switch enables a link-time workaround
for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53
processors.  The workaround is disabled by default.  It can be enabled
by specifying ‘--fix-cortex-a53-835769’, or disabled unconditionally by
specifying ‘--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769’.

   Please contact ARM for further details.

   The ‘--no-merge-exidx-entries’ switch disables the merging of
adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.

   The ‘--long-plt’ option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries which
support up to 4Gb of code.  The default is to use 12 byte PLT entries
which only support 512Mb of code.

   The ‘--no-apply-dynamic-relocs’ option makes AArch64 linker do not
apply link-time values for dynamic relocations.

   All SG veneers are placed in the special output section
‘.gnu.sgstubs’.  Its start address must be set, either with the
command-line option ‘--section-start’ or in a linker script, to indicate
where to place these veneers in memory.

   The ‘--cmse-implib’ option requests that the import libraries
specified by the ‘--out-implib’ and ‘--in-implib’ options are secure
gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure executable
against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.

   The ‘--in-implib=file’ specifies an input import library whose
symbols must keep the same address in the executable being produced.  A
warning is given if no ‘--out-implib’ is given but new symbols have been
introduced in the executable that should be listed in its import
library.  Otherwise, if ‘--out-implib’ is specified, the symbols are
added to the output import library.  A warning is also given if some
symbols present in the input import library have disappeared from the
executable.  This option is only effective for Secure Gateway import
libraries, ie.  when ‘--cmse-implib’ is specified.


File: ld.info,  Node: HPPA ELF32,  Next: M68K,  Prev: ARM,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.4 ‘ld’ and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
====================================

When generating a shared library, ‘ld’ will by default generate import
stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.  The
‘--multi-subspace’ switch causes ‘ld’ to generate export stubs, and
different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
sub-spaces.

   Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by ‘ld’ in stub
sections located between groups of input sections.  ‘--stub-group-size’
specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may serve
two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section, and one
group after it.  However, when using conditional branches that require
stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for ‘N’ chooses
this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a negative
offset.  Two special values of ‘N’ are recognized, ‘1’ and ‘-1’.  These
both instruct ‘ld’ to automatically size input section groups for the
branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement
as other positive or negative values of ‘N’ respectively.

   Note that ‘--stub-group-size’ does not split input sections.  A
single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.


File: ld.info,  Node: M68K,  Next: MIPS,  Prev: HPPA ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.5 ‘ld’ and the Motorola 68K family
====================================

The ‘--got=TYPE’ option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.  The
choices are ‘single’, ‘negative’, ‘multigot’ and ‘target’.  When
‘target’ is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation
scheme for the current target.  ‘single’ tells the linker to generate a
single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets.  ‘negative’
instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both
negative and positive offsets.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
‘multigot’ allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output
file.  All GOT references from a single input object file access the
same GOT, but references from different input object files might access
different GOTs.  Not all environments support such GOTs.


File: ld.info,  Node: MIPS,  Next: MMIX,  Prev: M68K,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.6 ‘ld’ and the MIPS family
============================

The ‘--insn32’ and ‘--no-insn32’ options control the choice of microMIPS
instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that in the
PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation.  If ‘--insn32’ is used,
then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings.  By default or
if ‘--no-insn32’ is used, all instruction encodings are used, including
16-bit ones where possible.

   The ‘--ignore-branch-isa’ and ‘--no-ignore-branch-isa’ options
control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions.  If
‘--ignore-branch-isa’ is used, then the linker accepts any branch
relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
calculation, except for some cases of ‘BAL’ instructions which meet
relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent ‘JALX’
instructions as the associated relocation is calculated.  By default or
if ‘--no-ignore-branch-isa’ is used a check is made causing the loss of
an ISA mode transition to produce an error.


File: ld.info,  Node: MMIX,  Next: MSP430,  Prev: MIPS,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.7 ‘ld’ and MMIX
=================

For MMIX, there is a choice of generating ‘ELF’ object files or ‘mmo’
object files when linking.  The simulator ‘mmix’ understands the ‘mmo’
format.  The binutils ‘objcopy’ utility can translate between the two
formats.

   There is one special section, the ‘.MMIX.reg_contents’ section.
Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
symbols, equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
‘.MMIX.reg_contents’ section corresponds to the first allocated global
register multiplied by 8.  Register ‘$255’ is not included in this
section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
‘Main’ for ‘mmo’ files.

   Global symbols with the prefix ‘__.MMIX.start.’, for example
‘__.MMIX.start..text’ and ‘__.MMIX.start..data’ are special.  The
default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a
section.

   Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
section, are left out from an mmo file.


File: ld.info,  Node: MSP430,  Next: NDS32,  Prev: MMIX,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.8 ‘ld’ and MSP430
===================

For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag
‘-m [mpu type]’ will select an appropriate linker script for selected
MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs just pass ‘-m help’ option to
the linker).

   The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
specific:

‘‘.vectors’’
     Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.

‘‘.bootloader’’
     Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any
     code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.

‘‘.infomem’’
     Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
     this section will be uploaded to the MPU.

‘‘.infomemnobits’’
     This is the same as the ‘.infomem’ section except that any code in
     this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.

‘‘.noinit’’
     Denotes a portion of RAM located above ‘.bss’ section.

     The last two sections are used by gcc.

‘--code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]’
     This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text*
     sections.  The argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is
     propagated to the linker using this option.

‘--data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]’
     This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
     [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections.  The argument
     passed to GCC for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using
     this option.

‘--disable-sec-transformation’
     Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the
     ‘--code-region’ and ‘--data-region’ options.  This is useful if you
     are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC wrapper,
     and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
     not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.


File: ld.info,  Node: NDS32,  Next: Nios II,  Prev: MSP430,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.9 ‘ld’ and NDS32
==================

For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior.  The
linker relaxes objects according to these options.

‘‘--m[no-]fp-as-gp’’
     Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.

‘‘--mexport-symbols=FILE’’
     Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.

‘‘--m[no-]ex9’’
     Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.

‘‘--mexport-ex9=FILE’’
     Export the EX9 table after linking.

‘‘--mimport-ex9=FILE’’
     Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.

‘‘--mupdate-ex9’’
     Update the existing EX9 table.

‘‘--mex9-limit=NUM’’
     Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.

‘‘--mex9-loop-aware’’
     Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.

‘‘--m[no-]ifc’’
     Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.

‘‘--mifc-loop-aware’’
     Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.


File: ld.info,  Node: Nios II,  Next: PowerPC ELF32,  Prev: NDS32,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.10 ‘ld’ and the Altera Nios II
================================

Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited
to transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
which may result in ‘ld’ giving ‘relocation truncated to fit’ errors
with very large programs.  The command-line option ‘--relax’ enables the
generation of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address
space for calls outside the normal ‘call’ and ‘jmpi’ address range.
These trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not
themselves be reachable if an input section and its associated call
trampolines are larger than 256MB.

   The ‘--relax’ option is enabled by default unless ‘-r’ is also
specified.  You can disable trampoline generation by using the
‘--no-relax’ linker option.  You can also disable this optimization
locally by using the ‘set .noat’ directive in assembly-language source
files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the ‘at’ register as a
temporary.

   Note that the linker ‘--relax’ option is independent of assembler
relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler’s ‘-relax-all’
option interferes with the linker’s more selective call instruction
relaxation.


File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC ELF32,  Next: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Prev: Nios II,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.11 ‘ld’ and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
========================================

Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
displacement, which may result in ‘ld’ giving ‘relocation truncated to
fit’ errors with very large programs.  ‘--relax’ enables the generation
of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space.  These
trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves be
reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size.  You may combine ‘-r’
and ‘--relax’ to add trampolines in a partial link.  In that case both
branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.

‘--bss-plt’
     Current PowerPC GCC accepts a ‘-msecure-plt’ option that generates
     code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
     security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
     writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
     ‘ld’ will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
     if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
     compiled with ‘-msecure-plt’.  ‘--bss-plt’ forces the old BSS PLT
     (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.

‘--secure-plt’
     ‘ld’ will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
     ‘-fpic’ or ‘-fPIC’ code, but does not do so automatically when
     linking non-PIC code.  This option requests the new PLT and GOT
     layout.  A warning will be given if some object file requires the
     old style BSS PLT.

‘--sdata-got’
     The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
     sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The location
     of ‘.plt’ must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
     section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The reason for the
     ‘.got’ change is more subtle: The new placement allows ‘.got’ to be
     read-only in applications linked with ‘-z relro -z now’.  However,
     this placement means that ‘.sdata’ cannot always be used in shared
     libraries, because the PowerPC ABI accesses ‘.sdata’ in shared
     libraries from the GOT pointer.  ‘--sdata-got’ forces the old GOT
     placement.  PowerPC GCC doesn’t use ‘.sdata’ in shared libraries,
     so this option is really only useful for other compilers that may
     do so.

‘--emit-stub-syms’
     This option causes ‘ld’ to label linker stubs with a local symbol
     that encodes the stub type and destination.

‘--no-tls-optimize’
     PowerPC ‘ld’ normally performs some optimization of code sequences
     used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to disable
     the optimization.


File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Next: S/390 ELF,  Prev: PowerPC ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.12 ‘ld’ and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
==========================================

‘--stub-group-size’
     Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are
     placed by ‘ld’ in stub sections located between groups of input
     sections.  ‘--stub-group-size’ specifies the maximum size of a
     group of input sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch
     offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
     sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
     it.  However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
     it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
     serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for ‘N’
     chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
     negative offset.  Two special values of ‘N’ are recognized, ‘1’ and
     ‘-1’.  These both instruct ‘ld’ to automatically size input section
     groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour
     regarding stub placement as other positive or negative values of
     ‘N’ respectively.

     Note that ‘--stub-group-size’ does not split input sections.  A
     single input section larger than the group size specified will of
     course create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections
     are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
     stub.

‘--emit-stub-syms’
     This option causes ‘ld’ to label linker stubs with a local symbol
     that encodes the stub type and destination.

‘--dotsyms’
‘--no-dotsyms’
     These two options control how ‘ld’ interprets version patterns in a
     version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a function
     descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a code
     entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (‘.’).  To properly
     version a function ‘foo’, the version script thus needs to control
     both ‘foo’ and ‘.foo’.  The option ‘--dotsyms’, on by default,
     automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.  Use
     ‘--no-dotsyms’ to disable this feature.

‘--save-restore-funcs’
‘--no-save-restore-funcs’
     These two options control whether PowerPC64 ‘ld’ automatically
     provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
     ‘-Os’ code.  The default is to provide any such referenced function
     for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable link.

‘--no-tls-optimize’
     PowerPC64 ‘ld’ normally performs some optimization of code
     sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
     disable the optimization.

‘--tls-get-addr-optimize’
‘--no-tls-get-addr-optimize’
     These options control how PowerPC64 ‘ld’ uses a special stub to
     call __tls_get_addr.  PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support an
     optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
     ‘__tls_get_addr’ for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
     stub without calling in to glibc.  By default the linker enables
     generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
     __tls_get_addr_opt.  Using ‘--tls-get-addr-optimize’ with an older
     glibc won’t do much besides slow down your applications, but may be
     useful if linking an application against an older glibc with the
     expectation that it will normally be used on systems having a newer
     glibc.  ‘--tls-get-addr-regsave’ forces generation of a stub that
     saves and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc.
     Normally, this is done when the linker detects a call to
     __tls_get_addr_desc.  Such calls then go via the register saving
     stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.  ‘--no-tls-get-addr-regsave’ disables
     generation of the register saves.

‘--no-opd-optimize’
     PowerPC64 ‘ld’ normally removes ‘.opd’ section entries
     corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
     by the action of ‘--gc-sections’ or linker script ‘/DISCARD/’.  Use
     this option to disable ‘.opd’ optimization.

‘--non-overlapping-opd’
     Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
     ‘.opd’ entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
     the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
     next entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.

‘--no-toc-optimize’
     PowerPC64 ‘ld’ normally removes unused ‘.toc’ section entries.
     Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
     the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section marks
     a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
     a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
     relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
     unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
     reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
     discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
     reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
     assembly code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to
     disable the optimization.

‘--no-inline-optimize’
     PowerPC64 ‘ld’ normally replaces inline PLT call sequences marked
     with ‘R_PPC64_PLTSEQ’, ‘R_PPC64_PLTCALL’, ‘R_PPC64_PLT16_HA’ and
     ‘R_PPC64_PLT16_LO_DS’ relocations by a number of ‘nop’s and a
     direct call when the function is defined locally and can’t be
     overridden by some other definition.  This option disables that
     optimization.

‘--no-multi-toc’
     If given any toc option besides ‘-mcmodel=medium’ or
     ‘-mcmodel=large’, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
     where TOC entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This
     limits the total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 ‘ld’ extends this limit
     by grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K
     for its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
     inter-group calls.  ‘ld’ does not split apart input sections, so
     cannot help if a single input file has a ‘.toc’ section that
     exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with ‘ld -r’.
     Use this option to turn off this feature.

‘--no-toc-sort’
     By default, ‘ld’ sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
     happens to have a section called ‘.init’ or ‘.fini’ are placed
     first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated with
     PowerPC64 gcc’s ‘-mcmodel=small’, and lastly TOC sections
     referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc’s
     ‘-mcmodel=medium’ or ‘-mcmodel=large’ options.  Doing this results
     in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn off
     this feature.

‘--plt-align’
‘--no-plt-align’
     Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
     aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
     boundary when using ‘--plt-align=’.  A negative value may be
     specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
     specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of
     boundaries if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a
     boundary).  By default PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte
     boundaries.

‘--plt-static-chain’
‘--no-plt-static-chain’
     Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
     chain pointer (r11).  ‘ld’ defaults to not loading the static chain
     since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.

‘--plt-thread-safe’
‘--no-plt-thread-safe’
     With power7’s weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when
     using lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread
     and have another thread see the individual plt entry words update
     in the wrong order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct
     order and using memory write barriers.  To avoid this we need some
     sort of read barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1.  By
     default, ‘ld’ looks for calls to commonly used functions that
     create threads, and if seen, adds the necessary barriers.  Use
     these options to change the default behaviour.

‘--plt-localentry’
‘--no-localentry’
     ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry
     point, ie.  global entry == local entry, and that have no
     requirement on r2 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is
     unchanged on return.  Such an external function can be called via
     the PLT without saving r2 or restoring it on return, avoiding a
     common load-hit-store for small functions.  The optimization is
     attractive, with up to 40% reduction in execution time for a small
     function, but can result in symbol interposition failures.  Also,
     minor changes in a shared library, including system libraries, can
     cause a function that was localentry:0 to become localentry:8.
     This will result in a dynamic loader complaint and failure to run.
     The option is experimental, use with care.  ‘--no-plt-localentry’
     is the default.

‘--power10-stubs’
‘--no-power10-stubs’
     When PowerPC64 ‘ld’ links input object files containing relocations
     used on power10 prefixed instructions it normally creates linkage
     stubs (PLT call and long branch) using power10 instructions for
     ‘@notoc’ PLT calls where ‘r2’ is not known.  The power10 notoc
     stubs are smaller and faster, so are preferred for power10.
     ‘--power10-stubs’ and ‘--no-power10-stubs’ allow you to override
     the linker’s selection of stub instructions.
     ‘--power10-stubs=auto’ allows the user to select the default auto
     mode.


File: ld.info,  Node: S/390 ELF,  Next: SPU ELF,  Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.13 ‘ld’ and S/390 ELF Support
===============================

‘--s390-pgste’
     This option marks the result file with a ‘PT_S390_PGSTE’ segment.
     The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
     binaries marked that way.


File: ld.info,  Node: SPU ELF,  Next: TI COFF,  Prev: S/390 ELF,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.14 ‘ld’ and SPU ELF Support
=============================

‘--plugin’
     This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.

‘--no-overlays’
     Normally, ‘ld’ recognizes calls to functions within overlay
     regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
     ‘ld’ also provides a built-in overlay manager.  This option turns
     off all this special overlay handling.

‘--emit-stub-syms’
     This option causes ‘ld’ to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
     that encodes the stub type and destination.

‘--extra-overlay-stubs’
     This option causes ‘ld’ to add overlay call stubs on all function
     calls out of overlay regions.  Normally stubs are not added on
     calls to non-overlay regions.

‘--local-store=lo:hi’
     ‘ld’ usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
     address range 0 to 256k.  This option may be used to change the
     range.  Disable the check entirely with ‘--local-store=0:0’.

‘--stack-analysis’
     SPU local store space is limited.  Over-allocation of stack space
     unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
     under-allocation results in runtime failures.  If given this
     option, ‘ld’ will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.  ‘ld’
     does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine the
     extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for stack
     adjusting instructions.  A call-graph is created by looking for
     relocations on branch instructions.  The graph is then searched for
     the maximum stack usage path.  Note that this analysis does not
     find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
     recursion and other cycles in the call graph.  Stack usage may be
     under-estimated if your code makes such calls.  Also, stack usage
     for dynamic allocation, e.g.  alloca, will not be detected.  If a
     link map is requested, detailed information about each function’s
     stack usage and calls will be given.

‘--emit-stack-syms’
     This option, if given along with ‘--stack-analysis’ will result in
     ‘ld’ emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.  These take
     the form ‘__stack_<function_name>’ for global functions, and
     ‘__stack_<number>_<function_name>’ for static functions.
     ‘<number>’ is the section id in hex.  The value of such symbols is
     the stack requirement for the corresponding function.  The symbol
     size will be zero, type ‘STT_NOTYPE’, binding ‘STB_LOCAL’, and
     section ‘SHN_ABS’.


File: ld.info,  Node: TI COFF,  Next: WIN32,  Prev: SPU ELF,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.15 ‘ld’’s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
================================================

The ‘--format’ switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
‘ld’ will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
depends on the default specified by the specific target.


File: ld.info,  Node: WIN32,  Next: Xtensa,  Prev: TI COFF,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.16 ‘ld’ and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
==================================

This section describes some of the win32 specific ‘ld’ issues.  See
*note Command-line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
command-line options mentioned here.

_import libraries_
     The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
     libraries, which contains information for linking to dll’s.  They
     are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
     archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of ‘ld’ have specific support
     for creating such libraries provided with the ‘--out-implib’
     command-line option.

_Resource only DLLs_
     It is possible to create a DLL that only contains resources, ie
     just a ‘.rsrc’ section, but in order to do so a custom linker
     script must be used.  This is because the built-in default linker
     scripts will always create ‘.text’ and ‘.idata’ sections, even if
     there is no input to go into them.

     The script should look like this, although the ‘OUTPUT_FORMAT’
     should be changed to match the desired format.

          OUTPUT_FORMAT(pei-i386)
          SECTIONS
          {
            . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
            . = ALIGN(__section_alignment__);
            .rsrc __image_base__ + __section_alignment__ : ALIGN(4)
            {
              KEEP (*(.rsrc))
              KEEP (*(.rsrc$*))
            }
            /DISCARD/ : { *(*) }
          }

     With this script saved to a file called, eg ‘rsrc.ld’, a command
     line like this can be used to create the resource only DLL
     ‘rsrc.dll’ from an input file called ‘rsrc.o’:

          ld -dll --subsystem windows -e 0 -s rsrc.o -o rsrc.dll -T rsrc.ld

_exporting DLL symbols_
     The cygwin/mingw ‘ld’ has several ways to export symbols for dll’s.

     _using auto-export functionality_
          By default ‘ld’ exports symbols with the auto-export
          functionality, which is controlled by the following
          command-line options:

             • –export-all-symbols [This is the default]
             • –exclude-symbols
             • –exclude-libs
             • –exclude-modules-for-implib
             • –version-script

          When auto-export is in operation, ‘ld’ will export all the
          non-local (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with
          the exception of a few symbols known to belong to the system’s
          runtime and libraries.  As it will often not be desirable to
          export all of a DLL’s symbols, which may include private
          functions that are not part of any public interface, the
          command-line options listed above may be used to filter
          symbols out from the list for exporting.  The ‘--output-def’
          option can be used in order to see the final list of exported
          symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.

          If ‘--export-all-symbols’ is not given explicitly on the
          command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be
          _disabled_ if either of the following are true:

             • A DEF file is used.
             • Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
               __declspec(dllexport) attribute.

     _using a DEF file_
          Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF
          file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
          should be exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is named
          ‘<dll name>.def’ and is added as any other object file to the
          linker’s command line.  The file’s name must end in ‘.def’ or
          ‘.DEF’.

               gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def

          Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
          unless the ‘--export-all-symbols’ option is also used.

          Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
          ‘xyz.dll’:

               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000

               EXPORTS
               foo
               bar
               _bar = bar
               another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
               var1 DATA
               doo = foo == foo2
               eoo DATA == var1

          This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and
          seven symbols in the export table.  The third exported symbol
          ‘_bar’ is an alias for the second.  The fourth symbol,
          ‘another_foo’ is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
          and treating it as an alias for ‘afoo’ exported from the DLL
          ‘abc.dll’.  The final symbol ‘var1’ is declared to be a data
          object.  The ‘doo’ symbol in export library is an alias of
          ‘foo’, which gets the string name in export table ‘foo2’.  The
          ‘eoo’ symbol is an data export symbol, which gets in export
          table the name ‘var1’.

          The optional ‘LIBRARY <name>’ command indicates the _internal_
          name of the output DLL. If ‘<name>’ does not include a suffix,
          the default library suffix, ‘.DLL’ is appended.

          When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
          than a library, the ‘NAME <name>’ command should be used
          instead of ‘LIBRARY’.  If ‘<name>’ does not include a suffix,
          the default executable suffix, ‘.EXE’ is appended.

          With either ‘LIBRARY <name>’ or ‘NAME <name>’ the optional
          specification ‘BASE = <number>’ may be used to specify a
          non-default base address for the image.

          If neither ‘LIBRARY <name>’ nor ‘NAME <name>’ is specified, or
          they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as
          the filename specified on the command line.

          The complete specification of an export symbol is:

               EXPORTS
                 ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
                    | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
                 [ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *

          Declares ‘<name1>’ as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
          declares ‘<name1>’ as an exported alias for ‘<name2>’; or
          declares ‘<name1>’ as a "forward" alias for the symbol
          ‘<external-name>’ in the DLL ‘<module-name>’.  Optionally, the
          symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal ‘<integer>’
          alias.  The optional ‘<name3>’ is the to be used string in
          import/export table for the symbol.

          The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:

          ‘NONAME’: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL’s export
          table.  It will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either
          the value specified by the .def specification or, otherwise,
          the value assigned by the linker).  The symbol name, however,
          does remain visible in the import library (if any), unless
          ‘PRIVATE’ is also specified.

          ‘DATA’: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
          function.  The import lib will export only an indirect
          reference to ‘foo’ as the symbol ‘_imp__foo’ (ie, ‘foo’ must
          be resolved as ‘*_imp__foo’).

          ‘CONSTANT’: Like ‘DATA’, but put the undecorated ‘foo’ as well
          as ‘_imp__foo’ into the import library.  Both refer to the
          read-only import address table’s pointer to the variable, not
          to the variable itself.  This can be dangerous.  If the user
          code fails to add the ‘dllimport’ attribute and also fails to
          explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
          attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.

          ‘PRIVATE’: Put the symbol in the DLL’s export table, but do
          not put it into the static import library used to resolve
          imports at link time.  The symbol can still be imported using
          the ‘LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress’ API at runtime or by using
          the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL without an
          import library.

          See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
          specification of other DEF file statements

          While linking a shared dll, ‘ld’ is able to create a DEF file
          with the ‘--output-def <file>’ command-line option.

     _Using decorations_
          Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
          source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
          to be exported is declared as:

               __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
               __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)

          All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
          any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
          in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled,
          unless the ‘--export-all-symbols’ option is also used.

          Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
          _not_ decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use
          dllimport, instead:

               __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
               __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)

          This complicates the structure of library header files,
          because when included by the library itself the header must
          declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
          included by client code the header must declare them as
          dllimport.  There are a number of idioms that are typically
          used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
          declaration completely.  See ‘--enable-auto-import’ and
          ‘automatic data imports’ for more information.

_automatic data imports_
     The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
     only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let
     the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with
     this issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port existing
     Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++ libraries
     and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was initially
     provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the decorations to
     achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x platforms.
     This feature is enabled with the ‘--enable-auto-import’
     command-line option, although it is enabled by default on
     cygwin/mingw.  The ‘--enable-auto-import’ option itself now serves
     mainly to suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when
     linked objects trigger the feature’s use.

     auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
     additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message

     "variable ’<var>’ can’t be auto-imported.  Please read the
     documentation for ld’s ‘--enable-auto-import’ for details."

     The ‘--enable-auto-import’ documentation explains why this error
     occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
     difficulty.  One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
     feature, described below.

     For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
     classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
     variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable–to specify a
     particular field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately,
     the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
     fixing these references at runtime without the additional
     information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.  The
     standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
     these references.

     The ‘--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs’ switch allows these references
     to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting
     the references themselves (with their non-zero addends) to
     specialized code provided by the runtime environment.  Recent
     versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers provide
     this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the support
     is only necessary on the developer’s platform; the compiled result
     will run without error on an older system.

     ‘--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs’ is not the default; it must be
     explicitly enabled as needed.

_direct linking to a dll_
     The cygwin/mingw ports of ‘ld’ support the direct linking,
     including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
     libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than does
     the traditional import library method, especially when linking
     large libraries or applications.  When ‘ld’ creates an import lib,
     each function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its
     own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many exports.  The
     overhead involved in storing, loading, and processing so many bfd’s
     is quite large, and explains the tremendous time, memory, and
     storage needed to link against particularly large or complex
     libraries when using import libs.

     Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other
     than ‘-L’ and ‘-l’, because ‘ld’ already searches for a number of
     names to match each library.  All that is needed from the
     developer’s perspective is an understanding of this search, in
     order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.

     For instance, when ld is called with the argument ‘-lxxx’ it will
     attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,

          libxxx.dll.a
          xxx.dll.a
          libxxx.a
          xxx.lib
          libxxx.lib
          cygxxx.dll (*)
          libxxx.dll
          xxx.dll

     before moving on to the next directory in the search path.

     (*) Actually, this is not ‘cygxxx.dll’ but in fact is
     ‘<prefix>xxx.dll’, where ‘<prefix>’ is set by the ‘ld’ option
     ‘--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>’.  In the case of cygwin, the
     standard gcc spec file includes ‘--dll-search-prefix=cyg’, so in
     effect we actually search for ‘cygxxx.dll’.

     Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use
     other ‘<prefix>’es, although at present only cygwin makes use of
     this feature.  It was originally intended to help avoid name
     conflicts among dll’s built for the various win32/un*x
     environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
     could coexist on the same machine.

     The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a ‘bin’ directory for
     applications and dll’s and a ‘lib’ directory for the import
     libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):

          bin/
          	cygxxx.dll
          lib/
          	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
          	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)

     Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
     done two ways:

     1.  Use the dll directly by adding the ‘bin’ path to the link line
          gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx

     However, as the dll’s often have version numbers appended to their
     names (‘cygncurses-5.dll’) this will often fail, unless one
     specifies ‘-L../bin -lncurses-5’ to include the version.  Import
     libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.

     2.  Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the ‘lib’
     directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
     should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
     making the app/dll.

          ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]

     Then you can link without any make environment changes.

          gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx

     This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the
     following is perfectly legal

          bin/
          	cygxxx-5.dll
          lib/
          	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll

     Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
     even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
     ‘--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs’ is used.

     Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
     justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There are
     three reasons:

     1.  Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did
     _not_ work with auto-imported data.

     2.  Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
     the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd’s for
     indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again,
     the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and
     it is not possible to do this without an import lib.

     3.  Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib.  This
     is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll’s (eg, the win32
     API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
     of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.

     So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
     true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
     dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
     binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the massive
     improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
     requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
     will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.

_symbol aliasing_
     _adding additional names_
          Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
          names.  A symbol ‘foo’ will be exported as ‘foo’, but it can
          also be exported as ‘_foo’ by using special directives in the
          DEF file when creating the dll.  This will affect also the
          optional created import library.  Consider the following DEF
          file:

               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000

               EXPORTS
               foo
               _foo = foo

          The line ‘_foo = foo’ maps the symbol ‘foo’ to ‘_foo’.

          Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
          the source code using the "weak" attribute:

               void foo () { /* Do something.  */; }
               void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));

          See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
          weak symbols.

     _renaming symbols_
          Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the
          cygwin kernel does this regularly.  A symbol ‘_foo’ can be
          exported as ‘foo’ but not as ‘_foo’ by using special
          directives in the DEF file.  (This will also affect the import
          library, if it is created).  In the following example:

               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000

               EXPORTS
               _foo = foo

          The line ‘_foo = foo’ maps the exported symbol ‘foo’ to
          ‘_foo’.

     Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
     unless the ‘--export-all-symbols’ command-line option is used.  If,
     however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
     _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
     are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the ‘--export-all-symbols’
     option.  If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
     use ‘--export-all-symbols’ to handle the other symbols, then the
     both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed symbols
     will be exported.  In effect, you’d be aliasing those symbols, not
     renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.

_weak externals_
     The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
     called weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol
     is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other
     symbol.  There are three variants of weak externals:
        • Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
          historically called lazy externals.
        • Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
          libraries.  This form is not presently implemented.
        • No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
          implemented.
     As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
     symbol are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking, the
     symbol uses a default value.

_aligned common symbols_
     As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify
     the desired alignment for a common symbol.  This information is
     conveyed from the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of
     GNU-specific commands carried in the object file’s ‘.drectve’
     section, which are recognized by ‘ld’ and respected when laying out
     the common symbols.  Native tools will be able to process object
     files employing this GNU extension, but will fail to respect the
     alignment instructions, and may issue noisy warnings about unknown
     linker directives.


File: ld.info,  Node: Xtensa,  Prev: WIN32,  Up: Machine Dependent

6.17 ‘ld’ and Xtensa Processors
===============================

The default ‘ld’ behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
‘SECTIONS’ commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
example, with the command:

     SECTIONS
     {
       .text : {
         *(.literal .text)
       }
     }

‘ld’ may interleave some of the ‘.literal’ and ‘.text’ sections from
different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid interleaving might place the
‘.literal’ sections from an initial group of files followed by the
‘.text’ sections of that group of files.  Then, the ‘.literal’ sections
from the rest of the files and the ‘.text’ sections from the rest of the
files would follow.

   Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of ‘ld’ and
provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
literal will be removed and all the ‘L32R’ instructions that use it will
be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the location of
the replacement literal is within the offset range of all the ‘L32R’
instructions.  The second optimization is to remove unnecessary overhead
from assembler-generated “longcall” sequences of ‘L32R’/‘CALLXN’ when
the target functions are within range of direct ‘CALLN’ instructions.

   For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the ‘CALLXN’
instruction to a ‘CALLN’ instruction, remove the ‘L32R’ instruction, and
remove the literal referenced by the ‘L32R’ instruction if it is not
used for anything else.  Removing the ‘L32R’ instruction always reduces
code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the alignment
of subsequent branch targets.  By default, the linker will always
preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions between
24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by inserting
a no-op in place of the ‘L32R’ instruction that was removed.  If code
size is more important than performance, the ‘--size-opt’ option can be
used to prevent the linker from widening density instructions or
inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops are required for
correctness.

   The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
control the linker:

‘--size-opt’
     When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
     size more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not
     insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
     target alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are
     required to preserve the correctness of the code.

‘--abi-windowed’
‘--abi-call0’
     Choose ABI for the output object and for the generated PLT code.
     PLT code inserted by the linker must match ABI of the output object
     because windowed and call0 ABI use incompatible function call
     conventions.  Default ABI is chosen by the ABI tag in the
     ‘.xtensa.info’ section of the first input object.  A warning is
     issued if ABI tags of input objects do not match each other or the
     chosen output object ABI.


File: ld.info,  Node: BFD,  Next: Reporting Bugs,  Prev: Machine Dependent,  Up: Top

7 BFD
*****

The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
object file formats available.  You can use ‘objdump -i’ (*note objdump:
(binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for your
configuration.

   As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
conflicting requirements.  The major factor influencing BFD design was
efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which would
not have been spent had BFD not been involved.  This is partly offset by
abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and back ends,
more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater
speed.

   One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
conversion and during output.  *Note BFD information loss::.

* Menu:

* BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD


File: ld.info,  Node: BFD outline,  Up: BFD

7.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
===================================

When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
the format of the input object file.  They then build a descriptor in
memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
the object file’s data structures.

   As different information from the object files is required, BFD reads
from different sections of the file and processes them.  For example, a
very common operation for the linker is processing symbol tables.  Each
BFD back end provides a routine for converting between the object file’s
representation of symbols and an internal canonical format.  When the
linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it calls through a
memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD back end which reads
and converts the table into a canonical form.  The linker then operates
upon the canonical form.  When the link is finished and the linker
writes the output file’s symbol table, another BFD back end routine is
called to take the newly created symbol table and convert it into the
chosen output format.

* Menu:

* BFD information loss::	Information Loss
* Canonical format::		The BFD	canonical object-file format


File: ld.info,  Node: BFD information loss,  Next: Canonical format,  Up: BFD outline

7.1.1 Information Loss
----------------------

_Information can be lost during output._  The output formats supported
by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can be
described in one form has nowhere to go in another format.  One example
of this is alignment information in ‘b.out’.  There is nowhere in an
‘a.out’ format file to store alignment information on the contained
data, so when a file is linked from ‘b.out’ and an ‘a.out’ image is
produced, alignment information will not propagate to the output file.
(The linker will still use the alignment information internally, so the
link is performed correctly).

   Another example is COFF section names.  COFF files may contain an
unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name.  If
the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
(e.g., ‘a.out’) or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
the link cannot be done simply.  You can circumvent this problem by
describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
command language.

   _Information can be lost during canonicalization._  The BFD internal
canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
internally.  This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
possible data richness through the transformation between external to
internal and back to external formats.

   This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
format and writes another.  Each BFD back end is responsible for
maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
to the back ends.  When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
is generated for BFD and the application.  At the same time, the back
end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost.  If the data
is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
information it prepared earlier.  Since there is a great deal of
commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when linking
or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or ‘a.out’ to ‘b.out’.
When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only lost from
the files whose format differs from the destination.


File: ld.info,  Node: Canonical format,  Prev: BFD information loss,  Up: BFD outline

7.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
------------------------------------------

The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
format.  A brief description of the canonical form may help you
understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
conversions.

_files_
     Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
     architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
     pageable bit, and a write protected bit.  Information like Unix
     magic numbers is not stored here—only the magic numbers’ meaning,
     so a ‘ZMAGIC’ file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
     write protected text bit set.  The byte order of the target is
     stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
     files may be used with one another.

_sections_
     Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
     the section’s original address in the object file, size and
     alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
     data structures.

_symbols_
     Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
     file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
     flag bits.  When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
     relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
     section where they were defined.  Doing this ensures that each
     symbol points to its containing section.  Each symbol also has a
     varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end.  Since
     the symbol points to the original file, the private data format for
     that symbol is accessible.  ‘ld’ can operate on a collection of
     symbols of wildly different formats without problems.

     Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output, so
     an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols pointing
     to functions and to global, static, and common variables.  Some
     symbol information is not worth retaining; in ‘a.out’, type
     information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
     This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
     linker has command-line switches to allow users to throw it away.

     There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
     format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
     example, COFF, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit within
     one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the information will
     be preserved.

_relocation level_
     Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
     symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
     section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
     descriptor.  Relocation is performed by passing messages through
     the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer.  Therefore,
     relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
     method that is only available in one of the input formats.  For
     instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format.  A relocation
     record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
     routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
     byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
     such relocation type.

_line numbers_
     Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
     mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
     output file.  These addresses have to be relocated along with the
     symbol information.  Each symbol with an associated list of line
     number records points to the first record of the list.  The head of
     a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
     allows finding out the address of the function whose line number is
     being described.  The rest of the list is made up of pairs: offsets
     into the section and line numbers.  Any format which can simply
     derive this information can pass it successfully between formats.


File: ld.info,  Node: Reporting Bugs,  Next: MRI,  Prev: BFD,  Up: Top

8 Reporting Bugs
****************

Your bug reports play an essential role in making ‘ld’ reliable.

   Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
is to help the entire community by making the next version of ‘ld’ work
better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of ‘ld’.

   In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
information that enables us to fix the bug.

* Menu:

* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs


File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Bug Reporting,  Up: Reporting Bugs

8.1 Have You Found a Bug?
=========================

If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
guidelines:

   • If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
     a ‘ld’ bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.

   • If ‘ld’ produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.

   • If ‘ld’ does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
     may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
     object files are correct.

   • If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
     improvement of ‘ld’ are welcome in any case.


File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Reporting,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: Reporting Bugs

8.2 How to Report Bugs
======================

A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
If you obtained ‘ld’ from a support organization, we recommend you
contact that organization first.

   You can find contact information for many support companies and
individuals in the file ‘etc/SERVICE’ in the GNU Emacs distribution.

   Otherwise, send bug reports for ‘ld’ to
<https://sourceware.org/bugzilla/>.

   The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this: *report
all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or leave it
out, state it!

   Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is
a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where
that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the
contents of that location would fool the linker into doing the right
thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a specific, complete
example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.

   Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on
the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.

   Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, “Does this ring a
bell?” This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.

   To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:

   • The version of ‘ld’.  ‘ld’ announces it if you start it with the
     ‘--version’ argument.

     Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
     looking for the bug in the current version of ‘ld’.

   • Any patches you may have applied to the ‘ld’ source, including any
     patches made to the ‘BFD’ library.

   • The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
     and version number.

   • What compiler (and its version) was used to compile ‘ld’—e.g.
     “‘gcc-2.7’”.

   • The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
     observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something
     important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output
     from make) is sufficient.

     If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
     wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.

   • A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
     the bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
     files provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than
     10K. For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or
     HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object file(s)
     to whomever requests them.  (Note - your email will be going to a
     mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with large
     attachments).  But small attachments are best.

     If the source files were assembled using ‘gas’ or compiled using
     ‘gcc’, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
     object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
     ‘gas’ or ‘gcc’ was used to produce the object files.  Also say how
     ‘gas’ or ‘gcc’ were configured.

   • A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
     incorrect.  For example, “It gets a fatal signal.”

     Of course, if the bug is that ‘ld’ gets a fatal signal, then we
     will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
     might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
     not give us a chance to make a mistake.

     Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
     still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
     such as, your copy of ‘ld’ is out of sync, or you have encountered
     a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
     copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
     crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
     was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
     crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
     observations.

   • If you wish to suggest changes to the ‘ld’ source, send us context
     diffs, as generated by ‘diff’ with the ‘-u’, ‘-c’, or ‘-p’ option.
     Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
     discuss something in the ‘ld’ source, refer to it by context, not
     by line number.

     The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in
     your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information
     to us.

   Here are some things that are not necessary:

   • A description of the envelope of the bug.

     Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
     which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
     changes will not affect it.

     This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
     we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
     debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
     examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.

     Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_ of
     the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
     output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
     less time, and so on.

     However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
     this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
     used.

   • A patch for the bug.

     A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
     omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
     assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with
     your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we might
     not understand it at all.

     Sometimes with a program as complicated as ‘ld’ it is very hard to
     construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
     path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
     not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that
     the bug is fixed.

     And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
     your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
     test case will help us to understand.

   • A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.

     Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
     such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.


File: ld.info,  Node: MRI,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Reporting Bugs,  Up: Top

Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
**************************************

To aid users making the transition to GNU ‘ld’ from the MRI linker, ‘ld’
can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the more
general-purpose linker scripting language described in *note Scripts::.
MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command set than the
scripting language otherwise used with ‘ld’.  GNU ‘ld’ supports the most
commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are described here.

   In general, MRI scripts aren’t of much use with the ‘a.out’ object
file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
features to make use of them.

   You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
‘-c’ command-line option.

   Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, ‘ld’ issues a
warning message, but continues processing the script.

   Lines beginning with ‘*’ are comments.

   You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
lower case; for example, ‘chip’ is the same as ‘CHIP’.  The following
list shows only the upper-case form of each command.

‘ABSOLUTE SECNAME’
‘ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME’
     Normally, ‘ld’ includes in the output file all sections from all
     the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use
     the ‘ABSOLUTE’ command to restrict the sections that will be
     present in your output program.  If the ‘ABSOLUTE’ command is used
     at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
     ‘ABSOLUTE’ commands will appear in the linker output.  You can
     still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
     line, or using ‘LOAD’) to resolve addresses in the output file.

‘ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME’
     Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME in
     a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.

     IN-SECNAME may be an integer.

‘ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION’
     Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION.  The EXPRESSION
     should be a power of two.

‘BASE EXPRESSION’
     Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
     absolute addresses) in the output file.

‘CHIP EXPRESSION’
‘CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION’
     This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.

‘END’
     This command does nothing whatever; it’s only accepted for
     compatibility.

‘FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT’
     Similar to the ‘OUTPUT_FORMAT’ command in the more general linker
     language, but restricted to S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is ‘S’

‘LIST ANYTHING...’
     Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
     ‘ld’ command-line option ‘-M’.

     The keyword ‘LIST’ may be followed by anything on the same line,
     with no change in its effect.

‘LOAD FILENAME’
‘LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME’
     Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
     same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the ‘ld’ command
     line.

‘NAME OUTPUT-NAME’
     OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by ‘ld’; the
     MRI-compatible command ‘NAME’ is equivalent to the command-line
     option ‘-o’ or the general script language command ‘OUTPUT’.

‘ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME’
‘ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME’
     Normally, ‘ld’ orders the sections in its output file in the order
     in which they first appear in the input files.  In an
     MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
     ‘ORDER’ command.  The sections you list with ‘ORDER’ will appear
     first in your output file, in the order specified.

‘PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION’
‘PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION’
‘PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION’
     Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
     linker input files.

‘SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION’
‘SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION’
‘SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION’
     You can use any of these three forms of the ‘SECT’ command to
     specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME.  If you
     have more than one ‘SECT’ statement for the same SECNAME, only the
     _first_ sets the start address.


File: ld.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: LD Index,  Prev: MRI,  Up: Top

Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
*****************************************

                     Version 1.3, 3 November 2008

     Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     <http://fsf.org/>

     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

  0. PREAMBLE

     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
     functional and useful document “free” in the sense of freedom: to
     assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
     with or without modifying it, either commercially or
     noncommercially.  Secondarily, this License preserves for the
     author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
     being considered responsible for modifications made by others.

     This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative
     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
     license designed for free software.

     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.  We
     recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
     instruction or reference.

  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS

     This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
     that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can
     be distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice
     grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
     to use that work under the conditions stated herein.  The
     “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work.  Any member
     of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”.  You accept
     the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way
     requiring permission under copyright law.

     A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the
     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
     modifications and/or translated into another language.

     A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section
     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall
     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
     fall directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document
     is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
     explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of
     historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
     of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
     regarding them.

     The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose
     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
     notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
     If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it
     is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.  The Document may
     contain zero Invariant Sections.  If the Document does not identify
     any Invariant Sections then there are none.

     The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are
     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
     that says that the Document is released under this License.  A
     Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
     be at most 25 words.

     A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
     general public, that is suitable for revising the document
     straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed
     of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely
     available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text
     formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats
     suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an otherwise
     Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has
     been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by
     readers is not Transparent.  An image format is not Transparent if
     used for any substantial amount of text.  A copy that is not
     “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.

     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming
     simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.
     Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG.
     Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and
     edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which
     the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and
     the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
     processors for output purposes only.

     The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title
     Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
     work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.

     The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies
     of the Document to the public.

     A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document
     whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
     following text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ
     stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
     “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.)
     To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the
     Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according
     to this definition.

     The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
     which states that this License applies to the Document.  These
     Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
     this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
     implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
     has no effect on the meaning of this License.

  2. VERBATIM COPYING

     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the
     conditions in section 3.

     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
     and you may publicly display copies.

  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY

     If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
     have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
     the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
     enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
     these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
     front cover must present the full title with all words of the title
     equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material on the
     covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the covers, as
     long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these
     conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.

     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
     adjacent pages.

     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
     numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
     Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with
     each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general
     network-using public has access to download using public-standard
     network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free
     of added material.  If you use the latter option, you must take
     reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque
     copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will
     remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one
     year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or
     through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.

     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
     the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies,
     to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
     Document.

  4. MODIFICATIONS

     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the
     Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing
     distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever
     possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these things in
     the Modified Version:

       A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
          distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
          versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
          History section of the Document).  You may use the same title
          as a previous version if the original publisher of that
          version gives permission.

       B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
          entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
          the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
          principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
          authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
          from this requirement.

       C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
          Modified Version, as the publisher.

       D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.

       E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
          adjacent to the other copyright notices.

       F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
          notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
          Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
          the Addendum below.

       G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
          Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s
          license notice.

       H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.

       I. Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title,
          and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
          authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the
          Title Page.  If there is no section Entitled “History” in the
          Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and
          publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add
          an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the
          previous sentence.

       J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
          for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
          likewise the network locations given in the Document for
          previous versions it was based on.  These may be placed in the
          “History” section.  You may omit a network location for a work
          that was published at least four years before the Document
          itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers
          to gives permission.

       K. For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”,
          Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section
          all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
          acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.

       L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered
          in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers or the
          equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.

       M. Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”.  Such a section
          may not be included in the Modified Version.

       N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
          “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant
          Section.

       O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.

     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
     material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
     some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their
     titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s
     license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any other
     section titles.

     You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains
     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
     parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
     been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of
     a standard.

     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
     the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage
     of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
     through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document
     already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added
     by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on
     behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old
     one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added
     the old one.

     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.

  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS

     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all
     of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
     combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
     their Warranty Disclaimers.

     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
     combined work.

     In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
     “History” in the various original documents, forming one section
     Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled
     “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”.  You
     must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”

  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS

     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents
     in all other respects.

     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
     License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
     document.

  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS

     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
     storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the
     copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
     legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual
     works permit.  When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
     License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
     are not themselves derivative works of the Document.

     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
     of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed
     on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
     electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
     form.  Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
     the whole aggregate.

  8. TRANSLATION

     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
     translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
     Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
     include the original English version of this License and the
     original versions of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a
     disagreement between the translation and the original version of
     this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
     prevail.

     If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”,
     “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to
     Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
     actual title.

  9. TERMINATION

     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
     except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
     otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
     and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.

     However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
     license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
     provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
     finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
     copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
     reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.

     Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
     reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
     violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
     received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
     that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
     after your receipt of the notice.

     Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
     the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you
     under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not
     permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the
     same material does not give you any rights to use it.

  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE

     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
     <http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/>.

     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
     version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you
     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
     that specified version or of any later version that has been
     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If the
     Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may
     choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
     Software Foundation.  If the Document specifies that a proxy can
     decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
     proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
     authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.

  11. RELICENSING

     “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any
     World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
     provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works.  A
     public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
     A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the
     site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
     site.

     “CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
     license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
     corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
     California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
     published by that same organization.

     “Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
     in part, as part of another Document.

     An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this
     License, and if all works that were first published under this
     License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
     incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
     texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
     to November 1, 2008.

     The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
     site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
     2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.

ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
====================================================

To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
notices just after the title page:

       Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
       Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
       under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
       or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
       with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
       Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
       Free Documentation License''.

   If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
Texts, replace the “with...Texts.” line with this:

         with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
         the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
         being LIST.

   If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
situation.

   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free
software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit
their use in free software.


File: ld.info,  Node: LD Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top

LD Index
********

[index]
* Menu:

* ":                                     Symbols.            (line    6)
* -(:                                    Options.            (line 1218)
* --accept-unknown-input-arch:           Options.            (line 1236)
* --add-needed:                          Options.            (line 1267)
* --add-stdcall-alias:                   Options.            (line 2453)
* --allow-multiple-definition:           Options.            (line 1646)
* --allow-shlib-undefined:               Options.            (line 1652)
* --as-needed:                           Options.            (line 1246)
* --audit AUDITLIB:                      Options.            (line  111)
* --auxiliary=NAME:                      Options.            (line  308)
* --bank-window:                         Options.            (line 2949)
* --base-file:                           Options.            (line 2458)
* --be8:                                 ARM.                (line   28)
* --branch-stub on C-SKY:                Options.            (line 2921)
* --bss-plt:                             PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
* --build-id:                            Options.            (line 2405)
* --build-id=STYLE:                      Options.            (line 2405)
* --check-sections:                      Options.            (line 1349)
* --cmse-implib:                         ARM.                (line  231)
* --code-region:                         MSP430.             (line   34)
* --compact-branches:                    Options.            (line 2994)
* --compress-debug-sections=none:        Options.            (line 2354)
* --compress-debug-sections=zlib:        Options.            (line 2354)
* --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi:   Options.            (line 2354)
* --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu:    Options.            (line 2354)
* --compress-debug-sections=zstd:        Options.            (line 2354)
* --copy-dt-needed-entries:              Options.            (line 1361)
* --cref:                                Options.            (line 1381)
* --ctf-share-types:                     Options.            (line 1405)
* --ctf-variables:                       Options.            (line 1394)
* --data-region:                         MSP430.             (line   39)
* --default-imported-symver:             Options.            (line 1702)
* --default-script=SCRIPT:               Options.            (line  743)
* --default-symver:                      Options.            (line 1698)
* --defsym=SYMBOL=EXP:                   Options.            (line 1449)
* --demangle[=STYLE]:                    Options.            (line 1469)
* --depaudit AUDITLIB:                   Options.            (line  164)
* --dependency-file=DEPFILE:             Options.            (line  609)
* --disable-auto-image-base:             Options.            (line 2635)
* --disable-auto-import:                 Options.            (line 2774)
* --disable-large-address-aware:         Options.            (line 2583)
* --disable-linker-version:              Options.            (line  184)
* --disable-long-section-names:          Options.            (line 2468)
* --disable-multiple-abs-defs:           Options.            (line 1500)
* --disable-new-dtags:                   Options.            (line 2328)
* --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:        Options.            (line 2787)
* --disable-sec-transformation:          MSP430.             (line   45)
* --disable-stdcall-fixup:               Options.            (line 2490)
* --discard-all:                         Options.            (line  836)
* --discard-locals:                      Options.            (line  840)
* --dll:                                 Options.            (line 2463)
* --dll-search-prefix:                   Options.            (line 2641)
* --dotsyms:                             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
* --dsbt-index:                          Options.            (line 2908)
* --dsbt-size:                           Options.            (line 2903)
* --dynamic-linker=FILE:                 Options.            (line 1482)
* --dynamic-list-cpp-new:                Options.            (line 1341)
* --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo:           Options.            (line 1345)
* --dynamic-list-data:                   Options.            (line 1338)
* --dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE:      Options.            (line 1325)
* --dynamicbase:                         Options.            (line 2831)
* --eh-frame-hdr:                        Options.            (line 2315)
* --embedded-relocs:                     Options.            (line 1495)
* --emit-relocs:                         Options.            (line  669)
* --emit-stack-syms:                     SPU ELF.            (line   46)
* --emit-stub-syms:                      PowerPC ELF32.      (line   47)
* --emit-stub-syms <1>:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
* --emit-stub-syms <2>:                  SPU ELF.            (line   15)
* --enable-auto-image-base:              Options.            (line 2626)
* --enable-auto-import:                  Options.            (line 2650)
* --enable-extra-pe-debug:               Options.            (line 2792)
* --enable-linker-version:               Options.            (line  174)
* --enable-long-section-names:           Options.            (line 2468)
* --enable-new-dtags:                    Options.            (line 2328)
* --enable-non-contiguous-regions:       Options.            (line  188)
* --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings: Options.         (line  220)
* --enable-reloc-section:                Options.            (line 2890)
* --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:         Options.            (line 2779)
* --enable-stdcall-fixup:                Options.            (line 2490)
* --entry=ENTRY:                         Options.            (line  226)
* --error-execstack:                     Options.            (line 2176)
* --error-handling-script=SCRIPTNAME:    Options.            (line 1679)
* --error-rwx-segments:                  Options.            (line 2219)
* --error-unresolved-symbols:            Options.            (line 2251)
* --exclude-all-symbols:                 Options.            (line 2543)
* --exclude-libs:                        Options.            (line  236)
* --exclude-modules-for-implib:          Options.            (line  247)
* --exclude-symbols:                     Options.            (line 2537)
* --export-all-symbols:                  Options.            (line 2513)
* --export-dynamic:                      Options.            (line  260)
* --export-dynamic-symbol-list=FILE:     Options.            (line  296)
* --export-dynamic-symbol=GLOB:          Options.            (line  287)
* --extra-overlay-stubs:                 SPU ELF.            (line   19)
* --fatal-warnings:                      Options.            (line 1504)
* --file-alignment:                      Options.            (line 2547)
* --filter=NAME:                         Options.            (line  329)
* --fix-arm1176:                         ARM.                (line  108)
* --fix-cortex-a53-835769:               ARM.                (line  208)
* --fix-cortex-a8:                       ARM.                (line  199)
* --fix-stm32l4xx-629360:                ARM.                (line  117)
* --fix-v4bx:                            ARM.                (line   48)
* --fix-v4bx-interworking:               ARM.                (line   61)
* --force-dynamic:                       Options.            (line  678)
* --force-exe-suffix:                    Options.            (line 1516)
* --force-group-allocation:              Options.            (line 1441)
* --forceinteg:                          Options.            (line 2839)
* --format=FORMAT:                       Options.            (line  121)
* --format=VERSION:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
* --gc-keep-exported:                    Options.            (line 1564)
* --gc-sections:                         Options.            (line 1526)
* --got:                                 Options.            (line 2961)
* --got=TYPE:                            M68K.               (line    6)
* --gpsize=VALUE:                        Options.            (line  361)
* --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Options.            (line 2338)
* --hash-style=STYLE:                    Options.            (line 2346)
* --heap:                                Options.            (line 2553)
* --help:                                Options.            (line 1592)
* --high-entropy-va:                     Options.            (line 2823)
* --ignore-branch-isa:                   Options.            (line 2982)
* --ignore-branch-isa <1>:               MIPS.               (line   13)
* --image-base:                          Options.            (line 2560)
* --imagic:                              Options.            (line 3031)
* --in-implib=FILE:                      ARM.                (line  236)
* --insert-timestamp:                    Options.            (line 2874)
* --insn32:                              Options.            (line 2973)
* --insn32 <1>:                          MIPS.               (line    6)
* --just-symbols=FILE:                   Options.            (line  700)
* --kill-at:                             Options.            (line 2569)
* --large-address-aware:                 Options.            (line 2574)
* --ld-generated-unwind-info:            Options.            (line 2321)
* --leading-underscore:                  Options.            (line 2507)
* --library-path=DIR:                    Options.            (line  419)
* --library=NAMESPEC:                    Options.            (line  386)
* --local-store=lo:hi:                   SPU ELF.            (line   24)
* --long-plt:                            ARM.                (line  219)
* --major-image-version:                 Options.            (line 2590)
* --major-os-version:                    Options.            (line 2595)
* --major-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 2599)
* --max-cache-size=SIZE:                 Options.            (line 2400)
* --merge-exidx-entries:                 ARM.                (line  216)
* --minor-image-version:                 Options.            (line 2604)
* --minor-os-version:                    Options.            (line 2609)
* --minor-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 2613)
* --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE:              Options.            (line  145)
* --multi-subspace:                      HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
* --nmagic:                              Options.            (line  582)
* --nmagic <1>:                          Options.            (line 3021)
* --no-accept-unknown-input-arch:        Options.            (line 1236)
* --no-add-needed:                       Options.            (line 1267)
* --no-allow-shlib-undefined:            Options.            (line 1652)
* --no-apply-dynamic-relocs:             ARM.                (line  223)
* --no-as-needed:                        Options.            (line 1246)
* --no-bind:                             Options.            (line 2860)
* --no-check-sections:                   Options.            (line 1349)
* --no-compact-branches:                 Options.            (line 2995)
* --no-copy-dt-needed-entries:           Options.            (line 1361)
* --no-ctf-variables:                    Options.            (line 1394)
* --no-define-common:                    Options.            (line 1425)
* --no-demangle:                         Options.            (line 1469)
* --no-dotsyms:                          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
* --no-dynamic-linker:                   Options.            (line 1489)
* --no-eh-frame-hdr:                     Options.            (line 2315)
* --no-enum-size-warning:                ARM.                (line  155)
* --no-export-dynamic:                   Options.            (line  260)
* --no-fatal-warnings:                   Options.            (line 1504)
* --no-fix-arm1176:                      ARM.                (line  108)
* --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769:            ARM.                (line  208)
* --no-fix-cortex-a8:                    ARM.                (line  199)
* --no-gc-sections:                      Options.            (line 1526)
* --no-ignore-branch-isa:                Options.            (line 2983)
* --no-ignore-branch-isa <1>:            MIPS.               (line   13)
* --no-inline-optimize:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  101)
* --no-insn32:                           Options.            (line 2974)
* --no-insn32 <1>:                       MIPS.               (line    6)
* --no-isolation:                        Options.            (line 2850)
* --no-keep-memory:                      Options.            (line 1629)
* --no-leading-underscore:               Options.            (line 2507)
* --no-merge-exidx-entries:              Options.            (line 2915)
* --no-merge-exidx-entries <1>:          ARM.                (line  216)
* --no-multi-toc:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  109)
* --no-omagic:                           Options.            (line  597)
* --no-omagic <1>:                       Options.            (line 3045)
* --no-opd-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   75)
* --no-overlays:                         SPU ELF.            (line    9)
* --no-plt-align:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  131)
* --no-plt-localentry:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  160)
* --no-plt-static-chain:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  142)
* --no-plt-thread-safe:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  148)
* --no-power10-stubs:                    PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  176)
* --no-print-gc-sections:                Options.            (line 1555)
* --no-print-map-discarded:              Options.            (line  569)
* --no-print-map-locals:                 Options.            (line  574)
* --no-save-restore-funcs:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   44)
* --no-seh:                              Options.            (line 2855)
* --no-strip-discarded:                  Options.            (line  720)
* --no-tls-get-addr-optimize:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   56)
* --no-tls-get-addr-regsave:             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   56)
* --no-tls-optimize:                     PowerPC ELF32.      (line   51)
* --no-tls-optimize <1>:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   51)
* --no-toc-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   87)
* --no-toc-sort:                         PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  121)
* --no-trampoline:                       Options.            (line 2943)
* --no-undefined:                        Options.            (line 1636)
* --no-undefined-version:                Options.            (line 1693)
* --no-warn-mismatch:                    Options.            (line 1706)
* --no-warn-search-mismatch:             Options.            (line 1715)
* --no-warnings:                         Options.            (line 1509)
* --no-wchar-size-warning:               ARM.                (line  162)
* --no-whole-archive:                    Options.            (line 1719)
* --noinhibit-exec:                      Options.            (line 1723)
* --non-overlapping-opd:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   81)
* --nxcompat:                            Options.            (line 2844)
* --oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT:               Options.            (line 1734)
* --omagic:                              Options.            (line  588)
* --omagic <1>:                          Options.            (line 3010)
* --orphan-handling=MODE:                Options.            (line  792)
* --out-implib:                          Options.            (line 1747)
* --output-def:                          Options.            (line 2618)
* --output=OUTPUT:                       Options.            (line  603)
* --package-metadata=JSON:               Options.            (line 2427)
* --pic-executable:                      Options.            (line 1756)
* --pic-veneer:                          ARM.                (line  168)
* --plt-align:                           PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  131)
* --plt-localentry:                      PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  160)
* --plt-static-chain:                    PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  142)
* --plt-thread-safe:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  148)
* --plugin:                              SPU ELF.            (line    6)
* --pop-state:                           Options.            (line  665)
* --power10-stubs:                       PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  176)
* --print-gc-sections:                   Options.            (line 1555)
* --print-map:                           Options.            (line  506)
* --print-map-discarded:                 Options.            (line  569)
* --print-map-locals:                    Options.            (line  574)
* --print-memory-usage:                  Options.            (line 1580)
* --print-output-format:                 Options.            (line 1574)
* --push-state:                          Options.            (line  647)
* --reduce-memory-overheads:             Options.            (line 2386)
* --relax:                               Options.            (line 1775)
* --relax on Nios II:                    Nios II.            (line    6)
* --relax on PowerPC:                    PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
* --relax on Xtensa:                     Xtensa.             (line   27)
* --relocatable:                         Options.            (line  682)
* --remap-inputs-file=file:              Options.            (line  454)
* --remap-inputs=pattern=filename:       Options.            (line  454)
* --require-defined=SYMBOL:              Options.            (line  769)
* --retain-symbols-file=FILENAME:        Options.            (line 1801)
* --s390-pgste:                          S/390 ELF.          (line    6)
* --save-restore-funcs:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   44)
* --script=SCRIPT:                       Options.            (line  733)
* --sdata-got:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   33)
* --section-alignment:                   Options.            (line 2797)
* --section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG:       Options.            (line 1996)
* --secure-plt:                          PowerPC ELF32.      (line   26)
* --sort-common:                         Options.            (line 1928)
* --sort-section=alignment:              Options.            (line 1943)
* --sort-section=name:                   Options.            (line 1939)
* --spare-dynamic-tags:                  Options.            (line 1947)
* --split-by-file:                       Options.            (line 1952)
* --split-by-reloc:                      Options.            (line 1957)
* --stack:                               Options.            (line 2803)
* --stack-analysis:                      SPU ELF.            (line   29)
* --stats:                               Options.            (line 1970)
* --strip-all:                           Options.            (line  711)
* --strip-debug:                         Options.            (line  715)
* --strip-discarded:                     Options.            (line  720)
* --stub-group-size:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
* --stub-group-size on C-SKY:            Options.            (line 2928)
* --stub-group-size=N:                   ARM.                (line  173)
* --stub-group-size=N <1>:               HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
* --subsystem:                           Options.            (line 2810)
* --support-old-code:                    ARM.                (line    6)
* --sysroot=DIRECTORY:                   Options.            (line 1974)
* --target-help:                         Options.            (line 1596)
* --target1-abs:                         ARM.                (line   33)
* --target1-rel:                         ARM.                (line   33)
* --target2=TYPE:                        ARM.                (line   38)
* --task-link:                           Options.            (line 1979)
* --thumb-entry=ENTRY:                   ARM.                (line   17)
* --tls-get-addr-optimize:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   56)
* --tls-get-addr-regsave:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   56)
* --trace:                               Options.            (line  725)
* --trace-symbol=SYMBOL:                 Options.            (line  846)
* --traditional-format:                  Options.            (line 1984)
* --tsaware:                             Options.            (line 2869)
* --undefined=SYMBOL:                    Options.            (line  756)
* --unique[=SECTION]:                    Options.            (line  818)
* --unresolved-symbols:                  Options.            (line 2026)
* --use-blx:                             ARM.                (line   73)
* --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables:      ARM.                (line   23)
* --verbose[=NUMBER]:                    Options.            (line 2055)
* --version:                             Options.            (line  827)
* --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE:   Options.            (line 2063)
* --vfp11-denorm-fix:                    ARM.                (line   79)
* --warn-alternate-em:                   Options.            (line 2243)
* --warn-common:                         Options.            (line 2073)
* --warn-constructors:                   Options.            (line 2141)
* --warn-execstack:                      Options.            (line 2146)
* --warn-multiple-gp:                    Options.            (line 2188)
* --warn-once:                           Options.            (line 2202)
* --warn-rwx-segments:                   Options.            (line 2206)
* --warn-section-align:                  Options.            (line 2232)
* --warn-textrel:                        Options.            (line 2239)
* --warn-unresolved-symbols:             Options.            (line 2246)
* --wdmdriver:                           Options.            (line 2864)
* --whole-archive:                       Options.            (line 2255)
* --wrap=SYMBOL:                         Options.            (line 2269)
* -a KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  104)
* -assert KEYWORD:                       Options.            (line 1274)
* -b FORMAT:                             Options.            (line  121)
* -Bdynamic:                             Options.            (line 1277)
* -Bgroup:                               Options.            (line 1287)
* -Bno-symbolic:                         Options.            (line 1321)
* -Bshareable:                           Options.            (line 1921)
* -Bstatic:                              Options.            (line 1294)
* -Bsymbolic:                            Options.            (line 1308)
* -Bsymbolic-functions:                  Options.            (line 1315)
* -c MRI-CMDFILE:                        Options.            (line  145)
* -call_shared:                          Options.            (line 1277)
* -d:                                    Options.            (line  155)
* -dc:                                   Options.            (line  155)
* -dn:                                   Options.            (line 1294)
* -dp:                                   Options.            (line  155)
* -dT SCRIPT:                            Options.            (line  743)
* -dy:                                   Options.            (line 1277)
* -E:                                    Options.            (line  260)
* -e ENTRY:                              Options.            (line  226)
* -EB:                                   Options.            (line  301)
* -EL:                                   Options.            (line  304)
* -f NAME:                               Options.            (line  308)
* -F NAME:                               Options.            (line  329)
* -fini=NAME:                            Options.            (line  352)
* -g:                                    Options.            (line  358)
* -G VALUE:                              Options.            (line  361)
* -h NAME:                               Options.            (line  368)
* -i:                                    Options.            (line  377)
* -IFILE:                                Options.            (line 1482)
* -init=NAME:                            Options.            (line  380)
* -L DIR:                                Options.            (line  419)
* -l NAMESPEC:                           Options.            (line  386)
* -M:                                    Options.            (line  506)
* -m EMULATION:                          Options.            (line  444)
* -Map=MAPFILE:                          Options.            (line 1600)
* -n:                                    Options.            (line  582)
* -N:                                    Options.            (line  588)
* -N <1>:                                Options.            (line 3009)
* -n <1>:                                Options.            (line 3020)
* -no-pie:                               Options.            (line 1766)
* –no-relax:                             Options.            (line 1775)
* -non_shared:                           Options.            (line 1294)
* -nostdlib:                             Options.            (line 1729)
* -O LEVEL:                              Options.            (line  622)
* -o OUTPUT:                             Options.            (line  603)
* -P AUDITLIB:                           Options.            (line  164)
* -pie:                                  Options.            (line 1756)
* -plugin NAME:                          Options.            (line  632)
* -q:                                    Options.            (line  669)
* -qmagic:                               Options.            (line 1769)
* -Qy:                                   Options.            (line 1772)
* -r:                                    Options.            (line  682)
* -R FILE:                               Options.            (line  700)
* -rpath-link=DIR:                       Options.            (line 1842)
* -rpath=DIR:                            Options.            (line 1815)
* -s:                                    Options.            (line  711)
* -S:                                    Options.            (line  715)
* -shared:                               Options.            (line 1921)
* -soname=NAME:                          Options.            (line  368)
* -static:                               Options.            (line 1294)
* -t:                                    Options.            (line  725)
* -T SCRIPT:                             Options.            (line  733)
* -Tbss=ORG:                             Options.            (line 2005)
* -Tdata=ORG:                            Options.            (line 2005)
* -Tldata-segment=ORG:                   Options.            (line 2021)
* -Trodata-segment=ORG:                  Options.            (line 2015)
* -Ttext-segment=ORG:                    Options.            (line 2011)
* -Ttext=ORG:                            Options.            (line 2005)
* -u SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  756)
* -Ur:                                   Options.            (line  777)
* -v:                                    Options.            (line  827)
* -V:                                    Options.            (line  827)
* -w:                                    Options.            (line 1509)
* -x:                                    Options.            (line  836)
* -X:                                    Options.            (line  840)
* -Y PATH:                               Options.            (line  855)
* -y SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  846)
* -z:                                    Options.            (line 3030)
* -z defs:                               Options.            (line 1636)
* -z KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  859)
* -z muldefs:                            Options.            (line 1646)
* -z undefs:                             Options.            (line 1636)
* .:                                     Location Counter.   (line    6)
* /DISCARD/:                             Output Section Discarding.
                                                             (line   26)
* 32-bit PLT entries:                    ARM.                (line  219)
* :PHDR:                                 Output Section Phdr.
                                                             (line    6)
* =FILLEXP:                              Output Section Fill.
                                                             (line    6)
* >REGION:                               Output Section Region.
                                                             (line    6)
* [COMMON]:                              Input Section Common.
                                                             (line   29)
* AArch64 rela addend:                   ARM.                (line  223)
* ABSOLUTE (MRI):                        MRI.                (line   32)
* absolute and relocatable symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
* absolute expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
* ABSOLUTE(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
* ADDR(SECTION):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
* address, section:                      Output Section Address.
                                                             (line    6)
* ALIAS (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   43)
* ALIGN (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   49)
* align expression:                      Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
* align location counter:                Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
* ALIGN(ALIGN):                          Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
* ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
* ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN):                  Forced Output Alignment.
                                                             (line    6)
* aligned common symbols:                WIN32.              (line  445)
* ALIGNOF(SECTION):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   63)
* allocating memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
* architecture:                          Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line  127)
* archive files, from cmd line:          Options.            (line  386)
* archive search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   80)
* arithmetic:                            Expressions.        (line    6)
* arithmetic operators:                  Operators.          (line    6)
* ARM interworking support:              ARM.                (line    6)
* ARM1176 erratum workaround:            ARM.                (line  108)
* ASCIZ ``STRING'':                      Output Section Data.
                                                             (line    6)
* ASSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line    9)
* assertion in linker script:            Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line    9)
* assignment in scripts:                 Assignments.        (line    6)
* AS_NEEDED(FILES):                      File Commands.      (line   60)
* AT(LMA):                               Output Section LMA. (line    6)
* AT>LMA_REGION:                         Output Section LMA. (line    6)
* automatic data imports:                WIN32.              (line  214)
* back end:                              BFD.                (line    6)
* BASE (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   53)
* BE8:                                   ARM.                (line   28)
* BFD canonical format:                  Canonical format.   (line   11)
* BFD requirements:                      BFD.                (line   16)
* big-endian objects:                    Options.            (line  301)
* binary input format:                   Options.            (line  121)
* BLOCK(EXP):                            Builtin Functions.  (line   79)
* bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    6)
* bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
* bugs in ld:                            Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
* BYTE(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
                                                             (line    6)
* C++ constructors, arranging in link:   Output Section Keywords.
                                                             (line   19)
* CHIP (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   57)
* COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE:                   Environment.        (line   29)
* combining symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 2073)
* COMDAT:                                Options.            (line 1441)
* COMDAT <1>:                            Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   56)
* command files:                         Scripts.            (line    6)
* command line:                          Options.            (line    6)
* common allocation:                     Options.            (line  155)
* common allocation <1>:                 Options.            (line 1425)
* common allocation in linker script:    Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   46)
* common allocation in linker script <1>: Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   51)
* common symbol placement:               Input Section Common.
                                                             (line    6)
* COMMONPAGESIZE:                        Symbolic Constants. (line   13)
* compatibility, MRI:                    Options.            (line  145)
* CONSTANT:                              Symbolic Constants. (line    6)
* constants in linker scripts:           Constants.          (line    6)
* constraints on output sections:        Output Section Constraint.
                                                             (line    6)
* constructors:                          Options.            (line  777)
* CONSTRUCTORS:                          Output Section Keywords.
                                                             (line   19)
* constructors, arranging in link:       Output Section Keywords.
                                                             (line   19)
* Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround:  ARM.                (line  208)
* Cortex-A8 erratum workaround:          ARM.                (line  199)
* crash of linker:                       Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
* CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS:                 Output Section Keywords.
                                                             (line    9)
* creating a DEF file:                   WIN32.              (line  182)
* cross reference table:                 Options.            (line 1381)
* cross references:                      Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   94)
* cross references <1>:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line  110)
* ctf type sharing:                      Options.            (line 1405)
* ctf variables:                         Options.            (line 1394)
* current output location:               Location Counter.   (line    6)
* data:                                  Output Section Data.
                                                             (line    6)
* DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
                                                             (line   84)
* DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP):                 Builtin Functions.  (line  108)
* DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP):   Builtin Functions.  (line  114)
* dbx:                                   Options.            (line 1989)
* DEF files, creating:                   Options.            (line 2618)
* default emulation:                     Environment.        (line   21)
* default input format:                  Environment.        (line    9)
* defined symbol:                        Options.            (line  769)
* DEFINED(SYMBOL):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  127)
* deleting local symbols:                Options.            (line  836)
* demangling, default:                   Environment.        (line   29)
* demangling, from command line:         Options.            (line 1469)
* dependency file:                       Options.            (line  609)
* direct linking to a dll:               WIN32.              (line  262)
* discarding sections:                   Output Section Discarding.
                                                             (line    6)
* discontinuous memory:                  MEMORY.             (line    6)
* DLLs, creating:                        Options.            (line 2513)
* DLLs, creating <1>:                    Options.            (line 2618)
* DLLs, creating <2>:                    Options.            (line 2626)
* DLLs, linking to:                      Options.            (line 2641)
* dot:                                   Location Counter.   (line    6)
* dot inside sections:                   Location Counter.   (line   36)
* dot outside sections:                  Location Counter.   (line   66)
* dynamic linker, from command line:     Options.            (line 1482)
* dynamic symbol table:                  Options.            (line  260)
* ELF program headers:                   PHDRS.              (line    6)
* ELF symbol visibility:                 Options.            (line 1174)
* emulation:                             Options.            (line  444)
* emulation, default:                    Environment.        (line   21)
* END (MRI):                             MRI.                (line   61)
* endianness:                            Options.            (line  301)
* entry point:                           Entry Point.        (line    6)
* entry point, from command line:        Options.            (line  226)
* entry point, thumb:                    ARM.                (line   17)
* ENTRY(SYMBOL):                         Entry Point.        (line    6)
* error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line   12)
* example of linker script:              Simple Example.     (line    6)
* EXCLUDE_FILE:                          Input Section Basics.
                                                             (line   17)
* executable segments, warnings on:      Options.            (line 2206)
* executable stack, warnings on:         Options.            (line 2146)
* export dynamic symbol:                 Options.            (line  287)
* export dynamic symbol list:            Options.            (line  296)
* exporting DLL symbols:                 WIN32.              (line   48)
* expression evaluation order:           Evaluation.         (line    6)
* expression sections:                   Expression Section. (line    6)
* expression, absolute:                  Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
* expressions:                           Expressions.        (line    6)
* EXTERN:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   39)
* fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
* file name wildcard patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
                                                             (line    6)
* FILEHDR:                               PHDRS.              (line   62)
* filename symbols:                      Output Section Keywords.
                                                             (line    9)
* fill pattern, entire section:          Output Section Fill.
                                                             (line    6)
* FILL(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
                                                             (line   49)
* finalization function:                 Options.            (line  352)
* first input file:                      File Commands.      (line   88)
* first instruction:                     Entry Point.        (line    6)
* FIX_V4BX:                              ARM.                (line   48)
* FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING:                 ARM.                (line   61)
* FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION:               Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   46)
* FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION:                Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   56)
* forcing input section alignment:       Forced Input Alignment.
                                                             (line    6)
* forcing output section alignment:      Forced Output Alignment.
                                                             (line    6)
* forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options.         (line  678)
* FORMAT (MRI):                          MRI.                (line   65)
* functions in expressions:              Builtin Functions.  (line    6)
* garbage collection:                    Options.            (line 1526)
* garbage collection <1>:                Options.            (line 1555)
* garbage collection <2>:                Options.            (line 1564)
* garbage collection <3>:                Input Section Keep. (line    6)
* generating optimized output:           Options.            (line  622)
* GNU linker:                            Overview.           (line    6)
* GNUTARGET:                             Environment.        (line    9)
* group allocation in linker script:     Options.            (line 1441)
* group allocation in linker script <1>: Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   56)
* GROUP(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   53)
* grouping input files:                  File Commands.      (line   53)
* groups of archives:                    Options.            (line 1218)
* H8/300 support:                        H8/300.             (line    6)
* header size:                           Builtin Functions.  (line  197)
* heap size:                             Options.            (line 2553)
* help:                                  Options.            (line 1592)
* HIDDEN:                                HIDDEN.             (line    6)
* holes:                                 Location Counter.   (line   12)
* holes, filling:                        Output Section Data.
                                                             (line   49)
* HPPA multiple sub-space stubs:         HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
* HPPA stub grouping:                    HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
* image base:                            Options.            (line 2560)
* implicit linker scripts:               Implicit Linker Scripts.
                                                             (line    6)
* import libraries:                      WIN32.              (line   10)
* INCLUDE FILENAME:                      File Commands.      (line    9)
* including a linker script:             File Commands.      (line    9)
* including an entire archive:           Options.            (line 2255)
* incremental link:                      Options.            (line  377)
* INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION:             Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   51)
* initialization function:               Options.            (line  380)
* initialized data in ROM:               Output Section LMA. (line   39)
* input file format in linker script:    Format Commands.    (line   35)
* input filename symbols:                Output Section Keywords.
                                                             (line    9)
* input files in linker scripts:         File Commands.      (line   19)
* input files, displaying:               Options.            (line  725)
* input format:                          Options.            (line  121)
* input format <1>:                      Options.            (line  121)
* Input import library:                  ARM.                (line  236)
* input object files in linker scripts:  File Commands.      (line   19)
* input section alignment:               Forced Input Alignment.
                                                             (line    6)
* input section basics:                  Input Section Basics.
                                                             (line    6)
* input section wildcards:               Input Section Wildcards.
                                                             (line    6)
* input sections:                        Input Section.      (line    6)
* INPUT(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   19)
* INSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   62)
* insert user script into default script: Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   62)
* integer notation:                      Constants.          (line    6)
* integer suffixes:                      Constants.          (line   15)
* internal object-file format:           Canonical format.   (line   11)
* invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line   14)
* K and M integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   15)
* KEEP:                                  Input Section Keep. (line    6)
* l =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   72)
* lazy evaluation:                       Evaluation.         (line    6)
* ld bugs, reporting:                    Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
* ldata segment origin, cmd line:        Options.            (line 2022)
* LDEMULATION:                           Environment.        (line   21)
* LD_FEATURE(STRING):                    Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line  133)
* len =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   72)
* LENGTH =:                              MEMORY.             (line   72)
* LENGTH(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  144)
* library search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   80)
* link map:                              Options.            (line  506)
* link map discarded:                    Options.            (line  569)
* link-time runtime library search path: Options.            (line 1842)
* linker crash:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
* linker plugins:                        Plugins.            (line    6)
* linker script concepts:                Basic Script Concepts.
                                                             (line    6)
* linker script example:                 Simple Example.     (line    6)
* linker script file commands:           File Commands.      (line    6)
* linker script format:                  Script Format.      (line    6)
* linker script input object files:      File Commands.      (line   19)
* linker script simple commands:         Simple Commands.    (line    6)
* linker scripts:                        Scripts.            (line    6)
* LINKER_VERSION:                        Output Section Data.
                                                             (line   96)
* LINKER_VERSION <1>:                    Output Section Data.
                                                             (line   96)
* LIST (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   69)
* little-endian objects:                 Options.            (line  304)
* LOAD (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   76)
* load address:                          Output Section LMA. (line    6)
* LOADADDR(SECTION):                     Builtin Functions.  (line  147)
* loading, preventing:                   Output Section Type.
                                                             (line   49)
* local symbols, deleting:               Options.            (line  840)
* location counter:                      Location Counter.   (line    6)
* LOG2CEIL(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line  151)
* LONG(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
                                                             (line    6)
* M and K integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   15)
* M68HC11 and 68HC12 support:            M68HC11/68HC12.     (line    5)
* machine architecture:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line  127)
* machine dependencies:                  Machine Dependent.  (line    6)
* mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section.  (line    6)
* MAX:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  154)
* MAXPAGESIZE:                           Symbolic Constants. (line   10)
* MEMORY:                                MEMORY.             (line    6)
* memory region attributes:              MEMORY.             (line   34)
* memory regions:                        MEMORY.             (line    6)
* memory regions and sections:           Output Section Region.
                                                             (line    6)
* memory usage:                          Options.            (line 1580)
* memory usage <1>:                      Options.            (line 1629)
* Merging exidx entries:                 ARM.                (line  216)
* MIN:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  157)
* MIPS branch relocation check control:  MIPS.               (line   13)
* MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection: MIPS.         (line    6)
* Motorola 68K GOT generation:           M68K.               (line    6)
* MRI compatibility:                     MRI.                (line    6)
* MSP430 extra sections:                 MSP430.             (line   11)
* MSP430 Options:                        MSP430.             (line   34)
* NAME (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   82)
* name, section:                         Output Section Name.
                                                             (line    6)
* names:                                 Symbols.            (line    6)
* naming the output file:                Options.            (line  603)
* NEXT(EXP):                             Builtin Functions.  (line  161)
* Nios II call relaxation:               Nios II.            (line    6)
* NMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  582)
* NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   94)
* NOCROSSREFS_TO(TOSECTION FROMSECTIONS): Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line  110)
* NOLOAD:                                Output Section Type.
                                                             (line   49)
* not enough room for program headers:   Builtin Functions.  (line  202)
* NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING:                  ARM.                (line  155)
* NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING:                 ARM.                (line  162)
* o =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   67)
* objdump -i:                            BFD.                (line    6)
* object file management:                BFD.                (line    6)
* object files:                          Options.            (line   29)
* object formats available:              BFD.                (line    6)
* object size:                           Options.            (line  361)
* OMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  588)
* OMAGIC <1>:                            Options.            (line  597)
* ONLY_IF_RO:                            Output Section Constraint.
                                                             (line    6)
* ONLY_IF_RW:                            Output Section Constraint.
                                                             (line    6)
* opening object files:                  BFD outline.        (line    6)
* operators for arithmetic:              Operators.          (line    6)
* options:                               Options.            (line    6)
* ORDER (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   87)
* org =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   67)
* ORIGIN =:                              MEMORY.             (line   67)
* ORIGIN(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
* orphan:                                Orphan Sections.    (line    6)
* orphan sections:                       Options.            (line  792)
* output file after errors:              Options.            (line 1723)
* output file format in linker script:   Format Commands.    (line   10)
* output file name in linker script:     File Commands.      (line   70)
* output format:                         Options.            (line 1574)
* output section alignment:              Forced Output Alignment.
                                                             (line    6)
* output section attributes:             Output Section Attributes.
                                                             (line    6)
* output section data:                   Output Section Data.
                                                             (line    6)
* OUTPUT(FILENAME):                      File Commands.      (line   70)
* OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line  127)
* OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME):                Format Commands.    (line   10)
* OVERLAY:                               Overlay Description.
                                                             (line    6)
* overlays:                              Overlay Description.
                                                             (line    6)
* partial link:                          Options.            (line  682)
* PE import table prefixing:             ARM.                (line   23)
* PHDRS:                                 PHDRS.              (line    6)
* PHDRS <1>:                             PHDRS.              (line   62)
* PIC_VENEER:                            ARM.                (line  168)
* Placement of SG veneers:               ARM.                (line  226)
* plugins:                               Plugins.            (line    6)
* pop state governing input file handling: Options.          (line  665)
* position dependent executables:        Options.            (line 1767)
* position independent executables:      Options.            (line 1758)
* PowerPC ELF32 options:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
* PowerPC GOT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   33)
* PowerPC long branches:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
* PowerPC PLT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
* PowerPC stub symbols:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   47)
* PowerPC TLS optimization:              PowerPC ELF32.      (line   51)
* PowerPC64 dot symbols:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
* PowerPC64 ELF64 options:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
* PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization: PowerPC64 ELF64.
                                                             (line  160)
* PowerPC64 inline PLT call optimization: PowerPC64 ELF64.   (line  101)
* PowerPC64 multi-TOC:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  109)
* PowerPC64 OPD optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   75)
* PowerPC64 OPD spacing:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   81)
* PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain:  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  142)
* PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety: PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  148)
* PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment:          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  131)
* PowerPC64 Power10 stubs:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  176)
* PowerPC64 register save/restore functions: PowerPC64 ELF64.
                                                             (line   44)
* PowerPC64 stub grouping:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
* PowerPC64 stub symbols:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
* PowerPC64 TLS optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   51)
* PowerPC64 TOC optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   87)
* PowerPC64 TOC sorting:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  121)
* PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization: PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   56)
* precedence in expressions:             Operators.          (line    6)
* prevent unnecessary loading:           Output Section Type.
                                                             (line   49)
* program headers:                       PHDRS.              (line    6)
* program headers and sections:          Output Section Phdr.
                                                             (line    6)
* program headers, not enough room:      Builtin Functions.  (line  202)
* program segments:                      PHDRS.              (line    6)
* PROVIDE:                               PROVIDE.            (line    6)
* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:                        PROVIDE_HIDDEN.     (line    6)
* PUBLIC (MRI):                          MRI.                (line   95)
* push state governing input file handling: Options.         (line  647)
* QUAD(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
                                                             (line    6)
* quoted symbol names:                   Symbols.            (line    6)
* read-only text:                        Options.            (line  582)
* read/write from cmd line:              Options.            (line  588)
* region alias:                          REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
* region names:                          REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
* regions of memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
* REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION):           REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
* relative expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
* relaxing addressing modes:             Options.            (line 1775)
* relaxing on H8/300:                    H8/300.             (line    9)
* relaxing on M68HC11:                   M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   12)
* relaxing on NDS32:                     NDS32.              (line    6)
* relaxing on Xtensa:                    Xtensa.             (line   27)
* relocatable and absolute symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
* relocatable output:                    Options.            (line  682)
* remapping inputs:                      Options.            (line  454)
* removing sections:                     Output Section Discarding.
                                                             (line    6)
* reporting bugs in ld:                  Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
* requirements for BFD:                  BFD.                (line   16)
* retain relocations in final executable: Options.           (line  669)
* retaining specified symbols:           Options.            (line 1801)
* REVERSE:                               Input Section Wildcards.
                                                             (line   60)
* rodata segment origin, cmd line:       Options.            (line 2016)
* ROM initialized data:                  Output Section LMA. (line   39)
* round up expression:                   Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
* round up location counter:             Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
* runtime library name:                  Options.            (line  368)
* runtime library search path:           Options.            (line 1815)
* runtime pseudo-relocation:             WIN32.              (line  240)
* S/390:                                 S/390 ELF.          (line    6)
* S/390 ELF options:                     S/390 ELF.          (line    6)
* scaled integers:                       Constants.          (line   15)
* scommon section:                       Input Section Common.
                                                             (line   20)
* script files:                          Options.            (line  733)
* script files <1>:                      Options.            (line  743)
* scripts:                               Scripts.            (line    6)
* search directory, from cmd line:       Options.            (line  419)
* search path in linker script:          File Commands.      (line   80)
* SEARCH_DIR(PATH):                      File Commands.      (line   80)
* SECT (MRI):                            MRI.                (line  101)
* section address:                       Output Section Address.
                                                             (line    6)
* section address in expression:         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
* section alignment:                     Builtin Functions.  (line   63)
* section alignment, warnings on:        Options.            (line 2232)
* section data:                          Output Section Data.
                                                             (line    6)
* section fill pattern:                  Output Section Fill.
                                                             (line    6)
* section groups:                        Options.            (line 1441)
* section groups <1>:                    Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   56)
* section load address:                  Output Section LMA. (line    6)
* section load address in expression:    Builtin Functions.  (line  147)
* section name:                          Output Section Name.
                                                             (line    6)
* section name wildcard patterns:        Input Section Wildcards.
                                                             (line    6)
* section size:                          Builtin Functions.  (line  178)
* section, assigning to memory region:   Output Section Region.
                                                             (line    6)
* section, assigning to program header:  Output Section Phdr.
                                                             (line    6)
* SECTIONS:                              SECTIONS.           (line    6)
* sections, discarding:                  Output Section Discarding.
                                                             (line    6)
* sections, orphan:                      Options.            (line  792)
* Secure gateway import library:         ARM.                (line  231)
* segment origins, cmd line:             Options.            (line 2005)
* segments, ELF:                         PHDRS.              (line    6)
* SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT):       Builtin Functions.  (line  170)
* shared libraries:                      Options.            (line 1923)
* SHORT(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
                                                             (line    6)
* SIZEOF(SECTION):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  178)
* SIZEOF_HEADERS:                        Builtin Functions.  (line  197)
* small common symbols:                  Input Section Common.
                                                             (line   20)
* SORT:                                  Input Section Wildcards.
                                                             (line   58)
* SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT:                     Input Section Wildcards.
                                                             (line   45)
* SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY:                 Input Section Wildcards.
                                                             (line   51)
* SORT_BY_NAME:                          Input Section Wildcards.
                                                             (line   37)
* SORT_NONE:                             Input Section Wildcards.
                                                             (line  119)
* SPU:                                   SPU ELF.            (line   29)
* SPU <1>:                               SPU ELF.            (line   46)
* SPU ELF options:                       SPU ELF.            (line    6)
* SPU extra overlay stubs:               SPU ELF.            (line   19)
* SPU local store size:                  SPU ELF.            (line   24)
* SPU overlay stub symbols:              SPU ELF.            (line   15)
* SPU overlays:                          SPU ELF.            (line    9)
* SPU plugins:                           SPU ELF.            (line    6)
* SQUAD(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
                                                             (line    6)
* stack size:                            Options.            (line 2803)
* standard Unix system:                  Options.            (line    7)
* start of execution:                    Entry Point.        (line    6)
* start-stop-gc:                         Options.            (line 1159)
* STARTUP(FILENAME):                     File Commands.      (line   88)
* static library dependencies:           libdep Plugin.      (line    6)
* STM32L4xx erratum workaround:          ARM.                (line  117)
* strip all symbols:                     Options.            (line  711)
* strip debugger symbols:                Options.            (line  715)
* stripping all but some symbols:        Options.            (line 1801)
* STUB_GROUP_SIZE:                       ARM.                (line  173)
* SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN):            Forced Input Alignment.
                                                             (line    6)
* suffixes for integers:                 Constants.          (line   15)
* symbol defaults:                       Builtin Functions.  (line  127)
* symbol definition, scripts:            Assignments.        (line    6)
* symbol names:                          Symbols.            (line    6)
* symbol tracing:                        Options.            (line  846)
* symbol versions:                       VERSION.            (line    6)
* symbol-only input:                     Options.            (line  700)
* symbolic constants:                    Symbolic Constants. (line    6)
* symbols, from command line:            Options.            (line 1449)
* symbols, relocatable and absolute:     Expression Section. (line    6)
* symbols, require defined:              Options.            (line  769)
* symbols, retaining selectively:        Options.            (line 1801)
* synthesizing linker:                   Options.            (line 1775)
* synthesizing on H8/300:                H8/300.             (line   14)
* TARGET(BFDNAME):                       Format Commands.    (line   35)
* TARGET1:                               ARM.                (line   33)
* TARGET2:                               ARM.                (line   38)
* text segment origin, cmd line:         Options.            (line 2012)
* thumb entry point:                     ARM.                (line   17)
* TI COFF versions:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
* traditional format:                    Options.            (line 1984)
* trampoline generation on M68HC11:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   30)
* trampoline generation on M68HC12:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   30)
* unallocated address, next:             Builtin Functions.  (line  161)
* undefined symbol:                      Options.            (line  756)
* undefined symbol in linker script:     Miscellaneous Commands.
                                                             (line   39)
* undefined symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 2202)
* uninitialized data placement:          Input Section Common.
                                                             (line    6)
* unspecified memory:                    Output Section Data.
                                                             (line   49)
* usage:                                 Options.            (line 1592)
* USE_BLX:                               ARM.                (line   73)
* using a DEF file:                      WIN32.              (line   81)
* using auto-export functionality:       WIN32.              (line   51)
* Using decorations:                     WIN32.              (line  186)
* variables, defining:                   Assignments.        (line    6)
* verbose[=NUMBER]:                      Options.            (line 2055)
* version:                               Options.            (line  827)
* version script:                        VERSION.            (line    6)
* version script, symbol versions:       Options.            (line 2063)
* VERSION {script text}:                 VERSION.            (line    6)
* versions of symbols:                   VERSION.            (line    6)
* VFP11_DENORM_FIX:                      ARM.                (line   79)
* visibility:                            Options.            (line 1174)
* warnings, on combining symbols:        Options.            (line 2073)
* warnings, on executable stack:         Options.            (line 2146)
* warnings, on section alignment:        Options.            (line 2232)
* warnings, on undefined symbols:        Options.            (line 2202)
* warnings, on writeable and exectuable segments: Options.   (line 2206)
* weak externals:                        WIN32.              (line  430)
* what is this?:                         Overview.           (line    6)
* wildcard file name patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
                                                             (line    6)
* Xtensa options:                        Xtensa.             (line   55)
* Xtensa processors:                     Xtensa.             (line    6)



Tag Table:
Node: Top708
Node: Overview1589
Node: Invocation2736
Node: Options3148
Node: Environment148320
Node: Scripts150169
Node: Basic Script Concepts151913
Node: Script Format154693
Node: Simple Example155564
Node: Simple Commands158800
Node: Entry Point159305
Node: File Commands160379
Node: Format Commands164906
Node: REGION_ALIAS166954
Node: Miscellaneous Commands171949
Node: Assignments178260
Node: Simple Assignments178771
Node: HIDDEN180574
Node: PROVIDE181211
Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN182789
Node: Source Code Reference183039
Node: SECTIONS187002
Node: Output Section Description188922
Node: Output Section Name190171
Node: Output Section Address191072
Node: Input Section193325
Node: Input Section Basics194126
Node: Input Section Wildcards199280
Node: Input Section Common205523
Node: Input Section Keep207033
Node: Input Section Example207541
Node: Output Section Data209012
Node: Output Section Keywords214353
Node: Output Section Discarding218028
Node: Output Section Attributes219970
Node: Output Section Type221091
Node: Output Section LMA223476
Node: Forced Output Alignment226619
Node: Forced Input Alignment227050
Node: Output Section Constraint227438
Node: Output Section Region227874
Node: Output Section Phdr228311
Node: Output Section Fill228987
Node: Overlay Description230374
Node: MEMORY234919
Node: PHDRS239671
Node: VERSION245149
Node: Expressions253440
Node: Constants254453
Node: Symbolic Constants255395
Node: Symbols255962
Node: Orphan Sections256717
Node: Location Counter258310
Node: Operators262888
Node: Evaluation263918
Node: Expression Section265290
Node: Builtin Functions269368
Node: Implicit Linker Scripts278449
Node: Plugins279236
Node: libdep Plugin279796
Node: Special Sections281641
Node: Machine Dependent283799
Node: H8/300284972
Node: M68HC11/68HC12287173
Node: ARM288680
Node: HPPA ELF32301108
Node: M68K302783
Node: MIPS303732
Node: MMIX304892
Node: MSP430306113
Node: NDS32308106
Node: Nios II309154
Node: PowerPC ELF32310526
Node: PowerPC64 ELF64313471
Node: S/390 ELF323589
Node: SPU ELF323948
Node: TI COFF326674
Node: WIN32327214
Node: Xtensa348969
Node: BFD352524
Node: BFD outline353986
Node: BFD information loss355280
Node: Canonical format357834
Node: Reporting Bugs362179
Node: Bug Criteria362885
Node: Bug Reporting363608
Node: MRI370781
Node: GNU Free Documentation License375460
Node: LD Index400800

End Tag Table


Local Variables:
coding: utf-8
End:
